Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Metric Tutorials
April 2007
Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE
MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS.
THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT
EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time
of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI,
AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk
Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil
3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer,
Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer,
DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert,
DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up
Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical
Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream,
ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual
Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual
Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap.
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,
Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents
Contents | v
Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
vi | Contents
Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Importing from Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Importing Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Importing Text Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Contents | vii
Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
viii | Contents
Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Contents | ix
Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
x | Contents
Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Contents | xi
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
xii | Contents
Getting Started
1
1
2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started
Introduction
1
This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials
3
Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training
files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.
The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to
display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson.
NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture.
The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC
2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:
■ Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units.
Common file names have a c_ prefix.
■ Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix.
■ Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.
NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for
more information.
IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files
location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included
in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.
What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used
to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used
with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.
Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.
2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.
4 | Chapter 1 Introduction
4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.
Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As.
In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the
next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and
use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson.
■ For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file.
You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you
save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.
■ For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports
the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers
information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it.
In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information
from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture
collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the
project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model
views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and
change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the
software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these
kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important
because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture:
Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the
entire project.
The following are examples of these element relationships:
■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move
the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition.
■ Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the
relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional
characteristic.
■ The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or
roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and
maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change
something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any
affected elements.
Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of
relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these
concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.
6 | Chapter 1 Introduction
■ Components include windows, doors, and furniture.
■ Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation.
■ Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date.
■ Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.
This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and
modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in
Revit Architecture.
In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is
determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components.
Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other
cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most
architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to
understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture.
Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information
model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This
information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using
a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all
associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also
makes it easier to manage the project.
Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and
ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each
known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation.
To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.
Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All
elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation
elements.
■ A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building.
■ An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.
■ Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the
set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.
■ System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or
creating as separate files.
■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.
■ You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For
example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls
with different compositions.
■ System families can be transferred between projects.
Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910
x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can
have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type
within the same family.
Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building
(model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).
8 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar
with the user interface.
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project
and the view that is currently open.
By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level
1 floor plan view is the default open view.
TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.
TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.
While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another
timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context
menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function
you are performing and what is currently selected.
The Toolbar
10 | Chapter 1 Introduction
The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list
to view the list of doors.
The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays
a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the
components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.
The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are
10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by
selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.
11 Click OK.
Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components
■ View tab: commands for creating different views in the project
■ Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements
■ Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the
project construction documents
■ Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images
12 | Chapter 1 Introduction
■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans
■ Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands
■ Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans
■ Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project
■ Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information
To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the
Design Bar.
TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab
from the context menu.
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).
You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and
groups of your current project:
■ Right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups.
■ The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category
(doors, walls, windows), and group name. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or -
sign next to the name.
13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.
17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.
14 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the bottom left corner of the window, notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you
should do next. In this case, it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point."
TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.
TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view, use the Tab key to alternate
between nearby components.
19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area.
The elevation symbol consists of two parts, the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Make
sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. It highlights when the cursor is over it.
In the Status Bar, notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West.
20 Press TAB, and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol, Elevations:
Elevation: Elevation 5.
When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view, you can use the Status Bar
and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component.
■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Click the Help button, and the topic specific to the
dialog box opens. If there is no Help button displayed, press F1 to get help on that dialog box.
■ Windows: From any window, press F1 to get the topic associated with the window.
■ Toolbar: From the Toolbar, click , and then click on a specific menu command or command
button for Help. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed.
■ Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips, rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays.
TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu.
In the following steps, you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands.
16 | Chapter 1 Introduction
The 3D isometric view displays:
NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command.
7 Click Zoom To Fit, and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window.
8 Click in the drawing area, and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region.
The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.
9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom; this is referred to as a
crossing selection.
NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view, Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents
less than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments, click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.
11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view,
■ In the Dynamic View dialog, click Zoom, and drag the cursor in the drawing area.
■ Without clicking in the dialog, press and hold CTRL, hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse
button on a wheel mouse), and drag the cursor.
■ On a wheel mouse, roll the wheel to zoom the view.
13 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
When drawing or modifying a building model, it is important to understand how to adjust the size of
components in the drawing area. Small blue dots, called drag controls, display at the ends of selected lines
and walls in a plan view. Similar controls, referred to as shape handles, display along the ends, bottoms,
and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views.
14 Enter ZR, zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan, and select the wall, as shown:
Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. These are the drag controls.
18 | Chapter 1 Introduction
15 Click and drag the left control, moving the cursor to the left horizontally, to lengthen the wall.
16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.
Move an element
17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.
18 Select the Craftsman02 table, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
Some commands, such as Move and Copy, require two clicks to complete the command. After selecting
the element to be moved, for example, click to specify the starting position, and click again to specify the
ending position. In this case, you want to move the table closer to the wall.
21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Select the plant, and drag it
on top of the table.
Undo commands
23 On the Undo menu, select the second item in the list, Move.
Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. All commands are canceled up to and
including the selected command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.
20 | Chapter 1 Introduction
NOTE To quickly undo the previous action, on the Standard toolbar, click the Undo command, or press and
hold CTRL and enter Z.
End a command
25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it.
Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines.
23
24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs
Creating a Building
Information Model 2
In this tutorial, you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in
Revit® Architecture 2008. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors, a
curtain wall, a central service core, and a sloped roof over one corner of the
building.
As you develop the building design, you learn how to use parametric design
techniques. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your
grid. If the grid moves, the wall or column will move with it.
When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other, it is good practice
complete the exercises in this tutorial, you learn how to constrain elements and
25
Using this Tutorial
In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial, you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. You
set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. After the beginning exercises, subsequent
exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. In practice, you load any required family type that is not in your project, such
as a door or window, from the product library. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct
state for beginning the exercise, so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises.
5 Click OK.
The new project opens. In the drawing space in the right pane, notice four elevation markers.
In views that display elevation markers, you design inside the elevation markers. Each marker corresponds
to an elevation view in the project: North, South, East, West. You can access these views by double-clicking
the elevation marker arrow, or by opening the view in the Project Browser.
6 On the left side of the drawing screen, locate the Project Browser.
The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views, sheets,
schedules, and families in your project.
7 If necessary, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, Ceiling Plans, and Elevations (Building Elevation).
The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views, reflected
ceiling plan views, and elevation views created in the project by the template. These views are customizable:
you can rename them, change their properties, duplicate them, and delete them. You can also add views
to your project as you develop and document the building information model.
NOTE If you create a project without a template, only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are
created.
10 In the Project Browser, notice the Legends, Schedules/Quantities, Sheets (all), Families, Groups, and Revit
Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all).
As you design and document your building model, content and building model reports, such as schedules
and legends, will be accessible from the Project Browser.
TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser, it is good practice to precede the
level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser.
4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views.
5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans, notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views
are now named 00 Foundation.
6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height, enter -1800 mm, and press ENTER.
7 Double-click the Level 2 text, enter 01 Entry Level, and press ENTER.
8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views.
9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height, enter 0 mm, and press ENTER.
11 On the left side of the Project Browser, view the Design Bar.
The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. By default, not all the tabs are
visible. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab, which should display by default. If
it does not, place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar, right-click, and click Basics.
13 On the Options Bar, verify and Make Plan View are selected.
14 Click Plan View Types, verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected, and click OK.
When you add the new level, a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created.
15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line, and then move it up.
As you move the cursor, a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor
position.
16 Enter 3750 mm, and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line, 3750 mm above 01 Entry
Level.
17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels,
click to specify the endpoint of the level line, and press ESC.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 3, click Rename, and enter 02 Level.
19 Click OK.
20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view.
Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view.
21 In the Project Browser, verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well.
Next, you add another level, using a different option.
23 On the Options Bar, click , and for Offset, enter 3750 mm.
24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line, and move it slightly upward.
A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn, 3750 mm above the 02 Level line.
28 Using either the Draw or Pick option, add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level.
Name the levels:
■ 04 Level
■ 05 Roof Garden
■ 06 Roof
NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. If you create a level by copying it, the associated
floor and ceiling plan views are not created. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference.
29 Click the 06 Roof Level line, and zoom to the left endpoint of the line.
30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line, as shown.
31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only.
32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines.
Notice that by moving the top level, all the levels move. The lock icon that displays indicates that the
levels are vertically constrained. If you select a level and click its lock, the levels are no longer constrained,
and you can move them independently. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before
you continue on to the next exercise.
In the following exercise, you constrain the column heights to the roof level, so that if the roof elevation changes, the
column height changes as well. In a later exercise, you change the columns to round hollow steel columns.
■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area, specify a start point for the grid line.
■ Move the cursor up, until it is positioned under the top elevation marker, and specify the grid line
endpoint.
■ On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.
Next, use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the
existing line.
6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line:
■ On the Options Bar, click , and for Offset, enter 7500 mm.
■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line, and then place the cursor on the grid line to display
the location of the second grid line.
■ Click to place the grid line.
The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.
24 Press ESC.
The pins are hidden. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins.
31 Press ESC.
32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B, and unlock it.
33 While pressing CTRL, select grid line A.
34 On the Options Bar, click Activate Dimensions, and then select the dimension value between grid lines A
and B.
35 Enter 9000 mm, and press ENTER.
The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines.
36 On the Standard toolbar, click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension.
37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. If it is unlocked, lock it.
Next, create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. You want to view
the columns as if you were walking toward them.
■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid, and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid
line to place the camera.
The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips
display.
Adding Beams
In this exercise, you add beams to build the structure of the building model. You begin by adding beams to the 01
Entry Level floor plan, and then copy them to the subsequent levels.
3 Click the Detail Level icon , the icon on the right side of the scale.
A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. The
view is currently set to Coarse, which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines.
4 Click Medium.
5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
6 In the Type Selector, verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected.
7 On the Options Bar, click Grid.
8 While pressing CTRL, select each grid line.
The selected grid lines display as red.
Adding Beams | 39
Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06
12 On the View toolbar, click to view the default 3D view of the structure.
The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines.
20 Click Cancel.
21 With the column selected, right-click, and click Select All Instances.
All of the columns display as red.
25 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building, and if necessary, resize the view to see
the entire structure.
Adding Beams | 41
View the south elevation of the structure
27 At the lower left corner of the drawing, area, on the View Control Bar:
5 On the bottom left side of the grid, double-click the elevation marker arrow.
Adding Braces | 43
The associated framing elevation view displays.
6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view, so that you can see vertical
columns located on grid lines A and B.
7 On the Design Bar, click Brace.
8 In the Type Selector, verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected.
9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level, and when the endpoint snap displays,
click to specify the start point of the brace.
NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in
the building model. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them, but when placed the braces
are placed, visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays.
10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level, and click to specify the endpoint
of the brace.
11 Using the same technique, add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. After you add
the final brace, press ESC.
NOTE Do not copy or array braces. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between
elements.
12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height, enter 18000 mm, and press ENTER.
The height of the roof lowers.
IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level, delete it and redraw it. Make sure that you use the
endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.
Adding Braces | 45
13 Double-click the 04 Level height, enter 10000 mm, and press ENTER.
14 On the Standard toolbar, click twice to restore the original level heights.
Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure
18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views, as shown in the 3D view below.
27 Select one of the columns in the structure, and drag it away from the structure.
The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move.
28 On the Standard toolbar, click 3 times to restore the locked dimension, grid size, and roof height.
Creating a Foundation
In this exercise, you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes
the building load to the ground.
Creating a Foundation | 47
Before you can add the pile caps, you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. You learn how to
access the families that are stored in libraries included with software, and how to load specific families into a project.
After you load the pile cap family, you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view, where you must adjust
the view range before you can view them.
6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes).
7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm, and drag it to the drawing area.
8 At the top left of the grid, click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1.
A warning displays.
13 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.
Creating a Foundation | 49
14 Click File menu ➤ Save.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50.
NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. It is not
available in a perspective or camera view.
5 Select one of the beams, right-click, and click Select All Instances.
6 In the Type Selector, select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203.2x101.6x15.9.
7 On the Design Bar, click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.
Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type, the braces as well as the beams change. In
the following steps, you change the brace type.
20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm.
View the building model with the new structural element types
Adding Floors
In this exercise, you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building.
To create floors, you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. Some other Revit Architecture elements, such as roofs,
stairs, and railings are also created from sketches. In this exercise, you learn some different techniques that you can
use when sketching objects.
Dataset
3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge:
4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Do not lock the dimension.
5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions.
Adding Floors | 53
6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions:
9 Because you do not need to modify the floor, on the Design Bar, click Quit Sketch.
Next, you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model, using a different sketching technique.
You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry.
IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines.
12 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown,
and lock the dimensions.
13 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid.
14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
The 02 Level floor displays.
Adding Floors | 55
Add the 03 Level floor
21 Select the top 02 Level floor line, and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch.
The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line, and a lock icon displays.
22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor.
23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain
the floors.
Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level
Adding Floors | 57
42 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} to view the grid.
43 On the Standard toolbar, click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm.
44 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 00 Foundation, and lock the dimension that you
unlocked in a previous step.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
Adding a Roof
In this exercise, you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building.
■ Click .
■ For Offset, enter 1800 mm, and press ENTER.
5 Move the cursor over grid line E, and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. When a
green dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.
The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker.
Adding a Roof | 59
6 Select grid line 5, move the cursor slightly below the grid line, and when the green dashed line displays,
click to place the roof line.
The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker.
8 Select grid line C to place another roof line, and lock it.
9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line, and lock it.
10 Press ESC.
11 Trim the rooflines:
Adding a Roof | 61
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
■ Click .
9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint, and move it slightly toward the building interior.
10 When a green dashed line displays, click to place the 1st curtain wall segment.
11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm
from the grid lines toward the building interior.
12 On the Tools toolbar, click (Trim/Extend), and trim each curtain wall segment.
13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid, and lock the
dimensions.
If the grid moves, the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. These dimensions are not in a
sketch, so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them, you can delete the dimension, but opt to
keep the constraint when prompted.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
Dataset
2 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium.
3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
4 On the Model Categories tab, under the element list, click All.
All the elements in the list are selected.
5 Under Visibility, clear one element to clear all the elements, and click None.
6 Under Visibility, select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns.
Creating an Entrance | 65
Do not select Columns, as these usually represent internal pilasters.
7 Click OK.
11 When all 9 panels are selected, click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.
12 With the panels selected, in the Type Selector, select System Panel: Solid.
13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.
14 In the Select View Template dialog, select Architectural Elevation, and click OK.
15 Zoom to the drawing extents.
Creating an Entrance | 67
20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click South.
21 Zoom to the front of the building.
22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.
23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line, and click to select it.
Creating an Entrance | 69
36 Zoom in to the first panel.
37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion, press TAB until it is selected, select it, and unpin it.
38 Press DELETE.
39 Using the same process, remove the mullions from the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th panels.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
Dataset
■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column, and specify a point to complete the
callout.
8 Select the callout, select the grip closest to the callout head, and drag the grip down to position the callout
head below the grid as shown.
■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker.
■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left, and specify a point past grid line D.
16 Select the section box, and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level.
■ Click .
■ For Loc Line, select Finish Face: Exterior.
■ Click .
23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor, and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines
D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines.
24 On the Tools toolbar, click (Align), and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom
horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. Lock both alignments.
25 Press ESC.
26 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
27 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall faces.
28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid, and lock the dimension.
29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid, and lock the
dimension.
30 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Ceiling.
32 In the Type Selector, select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid.
33 On the Options Bar:
■ Click Sketch.
■ Click .
35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces.
36 Press ESC.
37 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls.
38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section), double-click Section Display Area.
39 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.
40 Move the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB until the chain of walls is selected, and click to select the
walls.
■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling, press TAB until you select the wall chain, and click to
select the walls.
■ On the Options Bar, for Top/Base, click Attach.
■ Select the 02 Level Floor.
■ To start the tiles on a wall edge, select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line, and drag it to the
interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall.
■ To position the grid, select a grid line; on the Tools toolbar, click Move, and specify a distance.
53 Click OK.
54 In the Type Properties dialog, click Cancel.
55 In the Element Properties dialog, click Cancel.
60 Press ESC.
61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
The complete stair displays, with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain.
8 On the Options Bar, click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair, including its handrails.
■ Click .
15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall, and lock the alignment.
16 Using the same technique, align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the
alignments.
20 Click OK to delete the dimension, but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other.
21 Select the stair, and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints.
The stair and walls move to the left.
TIP To flip the door swing, press the SPACEBAR before you place the door.
35 Press SHIFT, press and hold the left mouse button, and move the cursor to spin the building model.
You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building, but if you view the top level
of the building, you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. You must cut an opening through
the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs.
■ Click .
■ Click .
51 On the View toolbar, click , and spin the building so you can see the roof.
Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
59 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87.
Dataset
25 On the Options Bar, click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools, and click
(Circle).
26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew, move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520
mm displays, and click to place it.
27 Press ESC.
37 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the short horizontal line on the right, and press DELETE.
38 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
39 In the Error dialog, click Continue.
You need a closed sketch to complete the profile.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
52 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92.
TIP After you place the 1st planter, move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed
green line that helps you to place the next planter.
■ Click .
■ For Offset, enter 2400 mm.
24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B.
25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B, and click
to place the line.
26 Using the same method, sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5.
33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B, move the cursor up 900 mm, and click to
finish the line.
51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point.
52 Move the cursor toward the column, and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column.
53 In the Type Selector, select M_RPC Female: Cathy, and click to place her on the sidewalk.
59 In the camera view (3D View 1), click the car, and click .
60 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter -300 mm, and click OK.
61 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click West.
62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing.
Next, you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. When you select a
host for a component, you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host.
63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk.
64 Select Cathy, and on the Options Bar, click Pick Host.
69 Using the same method, pick the sidewalk as the host for the car.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
71 Proceed to the next exercise, “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99.
Dataset
5 On the View toolbar, click , press SHIFT, and spin the building.
Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof, you
delete the entire stairwell.
11 Click Open.
The building service core displays in your drawing.
15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening.
16 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.
25 Proceed to the final exercise, “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103.
You copy the railing type into your project from another project, where it is hosted within a railing family.
Dataset
21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch.
22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched, move the cursor vertically 1500
mm, and click to draw another line.
23 Complete the sketch as shown.
■ Click .
■ For Offset, enter 100 mm.
36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown.
A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added.
architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use
Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District, the Freighthouse Flats
urban luxury loft living spaces. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the
ceilings, balconies, and a roof garden. As the building is slated to receive historic
tax credits, the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. The
additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include
a 4th floor penthouse, exterior fire stairs, and north facing balconies for the 2nd
109
NOTE For training purposes, slight modifications to the building design have been made.
■ Create new project views, including plan, elevation, section, and detail views
■ Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans
■ Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation
effects
■ Create projects sheets that contain project views
111
Creating Views
In this lesson, you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views from existing
views, how to create section and elevation views, and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.
Dataset
10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
11 Under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.
12 In the Rename View dialog, enter Vicinity Plan, and click OK.
13 In the Project Browser, double-click Vicinity Plan.
14 On the View Control Bar, click the current scale, and click 1: 1000.
Next, hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.
Section view
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.
NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.
7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of
the building.
9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename.
10 In the Rename View dialog, enter South East, and click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South East.
12 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
13 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
14 In the Type Selector, select Section: Building Section.
15 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1:100.
16 Draw a section line through the building:
■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.
■ Move the cursor down, and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2
and 3.
17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through
the building.
19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section
head to the section line endpoint.
22 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.
23 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.
24 Select gridline F, select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble, and drag the top segment
of gridline F to the right.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.
■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair, and specify a point to complete the callout.
■ On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the callout boundary.
■ Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head, and move it to the left side of the
callout boundary.
■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building, and specify a point above and to the right of the roof
overhang.
■ Move the cursor diagonally down, and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.
17 In the Project Browser, expand Detail Views (Details), and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.
18 In the Rename View dialog, enter Roof Overhang Detail, and click OK.
19 In the Project Browser, under Detail Views (Details), double-click Roof Overhang Detail.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.
24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing, and on the Options Bar, click .
25 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Elevation Tag, select 12.5mm Square.
27 Click OK twice.
On the floor plan, notice the square elevation markers that display.
36 In the drawing, select the callout, and on the Options Bar, click .
37 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
38 In the Type Properties dialog, for Callout Tag, select , Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius.
39 Click OK twice.
40 Press ESC.
The custom callout head displays on the floor plan.
Presentation view
Dataset
2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.
The crop region displays as red, and features blue triangular grips and break marks.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black.
5 On the View Toolbar, click Zoom to Fit.
6 On the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click East, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Crop Region Visible.
8 Click OK.
■ Callouts
■ Elevations
■ Grids
■ Levels
■ Sections
16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click East, and click Create View Template From View.
17 In the New View Template dialog, enter Black and White Presentation Elevation, and click OK.
18 In the View Templates dialog, click OK.
19 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North.
20 In the Project Browser, right-click North, and click Apply View Template.
21 In the Select View Template dialog, select Black and White Presentation Elevation, click Apply, and click
OK.
The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view.
■ Under Primary Range, for Bottom, select Level Below (Level 4).
■ Under View Depth, for Level, select Level Below (Level 4).
■ Click OK twice.
NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.
6 In the Project Browser, select Roof Plan, right-click, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
8 In the View Range dialog:
NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan
Region.
■ In the left corner of the building, select the left endpoint of the outer wall.
■ Move you cursor diagonally, and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.
4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click Edit/New.
9 Click OK.
10 On the Filter tab, click Add.
11 Select Rated Walls, and click OK.
12 On the Filter tab, for Rated Walls, under Projection/Surface, click Override under Patterns.
13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Color, click No Override.
14 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, select the red color, and click OK.
15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Solid Fill.
16 Click OK.
17 Using the same method, apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well.
18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, click OK.
The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the
drawing at any time, but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
2 Select Copy of Level 1, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, and click OK.
4 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.
6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left, as shown.
9 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.
Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown
NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.
2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, and click OK.
4 On the View Control Bar, click the current scale, and click 1: 50.
5 Select the diagonal bottom wall, right-click, and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.
6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, under Visibility, select Walls.
7 Under Cut, click in the Patterns field, and click Override.
8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, under Pattern Overrides, for Color, click No Override.
9 On the left side of the Color dialog, click black, and click OK.
10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Solid fill.
11 Click OK twice.
19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.
26 On the floor plan, select the sofa, right-click, and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.
27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog, click Projection Lines.
28 For Color, click By Category Override.
29 In the Color dialog, select a bright green color, and click OK twice.
32 Select one of the lamps, right-click, and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.
Dataset
TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar, right-click, and click View.
The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The text fields
in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters
with the appropriate text fields.
NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every
time the project file is saved.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the title block.
5 When the title block highlights, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data:
12 Click OK.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, continue to add project information:
14 Click OK.
The new project information displays in the titleblock.
19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps, create the following new project sheets:
■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan
1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A102 - Floor Plan.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 1, and drag it to the sheet.
3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet, and
click to place the view.
The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.
7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet, align it with the East elevation, and click
to place it.
8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet, and on the Options Bar, click .
14 In the Element Properties dialog, for View Scale, select 1:5, and click OK.
15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.
Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.
16 Select title bar, and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.
Dataset
■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on.
12 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.
19 Select the view on the sheet, and on the Options Bar, click .
20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
22 In the Name dialog, enter Viewport/no title mark, and click OK.
23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Show title, select No.
24 Click OK twice.
25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The title bar no longer displays on the sheet.
such as doors and windows. You also learn to create different types of schedules,
such as room and window schedules, in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.
159
Tagging Objects
In this lesson, you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. You learn how to
3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room Separation.
Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.
NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Room
and Area.
5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right,
as shown:
6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the
living area.
12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room.
13 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on placement is selected.
14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view, and click to place the room and tag.
The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged, and the rectangle contains the room tag.
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the room tag.
The room tag number displays in blue, indicating that it can be edited.
17 Click the room text label, enter Entry, and press ENTER.
25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2.
26 On the Design Bar, click Room Tag.
The rooms are already placed, but they need to be tagged.
27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair), and moving clockwise, click to place a room tag in each of
the 5 rooms.
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
■ Entry door
■ Kitchen pantry door
■ Pocket door in toilet
■ Closet door in dining room
■ Living room door
7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, enter U18-2, and click OK.
10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.
11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.
9 Click Modify.
11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.
12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.
13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs.
14 Click Modify.
15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader.
17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2.
18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture tag : Standard, and click OK.
All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.
19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.
You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building
model.
Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to
a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.
Dataset
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.
7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ Count
■ Height
■ Level
■ Type Mark
■ Width
8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking
Move Up or Move Down.
9 Click OK.
10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show.
If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does.
11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.
The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the
building model.
NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window.
However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process.
13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to
redisplay the window instance schedule.
14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties.
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit.
16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark, and click OK
twice.
17 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER.
18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.
The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted.
23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H,
as shown:
26 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
■ Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category.
■ Under Parameter Data, for Name, enter Head Detail.
■ For Group parameter under, select Construction.
■ For Discipline, select Type.
5 Click OK.
The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog.
6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail.
7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK.
8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties.
9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and
click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ Head Detail
■ Jamb Detail
■ Sill Detail
11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.
12 Click OK twice.
13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail.
TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and while pressing the left mouse button, move the
cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.
6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ Count
■ Family and Type
■ Head Height
■ Sill Height
■ Width
■ Mark
7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule
that includes only the doors in Unit 18.
12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18.
13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.
NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.
3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK.
4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add.
The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields.
5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ Name
■ Level
■ Area
■ In the schedule, for room 101, for Name, enter Building Entry, and press ENTER.
■ For 102, enter Storage, and press ENTER.
■ For 103, enter Corridor, and press ENTER.
■ For 104, select Corridor.
■ For 105, select Storage.
■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog, under Visibility/Graphics Overrides,
expand Lines.
■ For Room Separation, under Projection/Surface, click the Lines field.
■ In the Lines field, click Override.
■ In the Line Graphics dialog, click the Color field.
■ Under Custom colors, click the bright green swatch, and click OK.
■ For Weight, select 9, and click OK.
4 Click OK.
Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1, and zoom in to the Corridor.
32 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Room Schedule, and click Properties.
33 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
34 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available fields, click Room Style, and click Add.
35 Click OK twice.
36 In the Project Browser, double-click Room Schedule.
The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule.
All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. The Room Style specification will be used later to
determine color fill in a room color diagram.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color
Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.
14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend.
A legend displays at the tip of the cursor.
15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
24 Click OK.
25 With the legend still selected, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
26 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
27 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Swatch Width, enter 25 mm.
28 Under Title Text, for Size, enter 5 mm, and click OK twice.
4 In the Type Selector, select Basic Roof : Wood Joist - Insulation on Plywood Deck - EPDM.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.
7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog, under Category, select Roofs, and click OK.
8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog, under Available fields, click Family and Type,
and click Add.
9 Using the same method, add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.
10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following values:
12 Click OK.
The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays.
14 In the Project Browser, right-click Roof Material Takeoff, and click Properties.
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit.
16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog, under Available fields, click Material: Cost, and click Add.
17 Click Calculated Value.
18 In the Calculated Value dialog, for Name, enter Estimated Cost.
19 For Formula, enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2).
The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be
calculated.
20 Click OK.
21 Click the Formatting tab, and under Fields, click Estimated Cost.
22 For Field formatting, select Calculate totals, and click OK twice.
23 In the Material Takeoff, for the Material: Cost field, enter the following values:
EPDM 16
Plywood 13.40
24 In the Project Browser, right-click Roof Material Takeoff, and click Properties.
28 Click OK 3 times.
NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects.
28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window, and press DELETE.
6 Move the cursor to the right, and click in the center of the corridor, above the exterior door as shown.
13 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines, and click (Properties).
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, enter 1-1, and click OK.
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double click Exiting Plan - Level 2.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
17 On the Options Bar, verify that Chain is selected.
28 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path, and click (Properties).
29 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, enter 2-1, and click OK.
30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.
43 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Level 1 Exit Distance, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate.
44 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance, and click Rename.
45 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 2 Exit Distance, and click OK.
46 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2 Exit Distance, and click Properties.
47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit.
48 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Filter by, in the third field, enter 2-, and click OK twice.
The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays.
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click the Design Bar, and click View.
■ Area
■ Volume
■ Width
■ Length
■ Assembly Code
■ Assembly Description
6 In the Project Browser, expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall, right-click Generic - 152 mm, and click Properties.
7 In the Type Properties dialog, for Assembly Code, click the Value field, and click the browse button.
8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog, expand C - Interiors\C10 - Interior Construction\C1010 -
Partitions\C1010100 - Fixed Partitions, click C1010145 - Partitions - Drywall w/ Metal Stud, and click OK
twice.
209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project
In this lesson, you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project, as the base elevation of most projects is rarely
at 0 mm. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project,
or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture
by defining levels as either project or shared levels.
Dataset
■ Click Duplicate.
■ In the Name dialog, enter8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK.
■ Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.
6 Click OK twice.
9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, enter 10000 mm, and press ENTER.
By entering 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project.
■ Press and hold CTRL, and select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level.
■ In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation.
■ On the Design Bar, click Modify.
All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.
Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit
Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically
when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch
profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn
on their visibility to view them.
Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space
planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions,
and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
Dimensioning | 215
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.
The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to
wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.
3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a green dashed line displays
along the left side of the curtain, select it.
4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a green dashed line
displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.
6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension.
The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls
without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained
in this way.
12
13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces.
14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.
15 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters.
16 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall.
17 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed,
and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.
Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances
18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and
reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.
■ Click (Radial).
■ For Prefer, select Wall faces.
23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it.
24 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension.
25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
■ Click (Angular).
■ For Prefer, verify Wall faces is selected.
36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension.
37 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
38 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.
6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.
7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the
dimension.
15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click
to place the dimension.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall
17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension.
18 Press and hold SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the
dimension down the wall.
20 Release SHIFT, and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition
wall.
21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line
gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall.
22 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
23 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on
page 227.
Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
2 Click (Properties).
3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
5 In the Name dialog, enter Office Standard, and click OK.
■ Click OK twice.
8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.
Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type
18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.
19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click .
22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ Click Rename.
■ In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Standard Notes, and click OK.
■ Under Text, for Text font, select CityBlueprint.
■ Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree.
■ Click OK twice.
29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text.
30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.
32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name.
33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
can detail directly in a view of the building information model, using detail
components to represent materials like lumber, plywood, and metal studs. These
components display at the required scale. For a detail that you do not want to
associate with the model, like a standard door header condition, you use a separate
drafting view in which to create the detail. The "drafted" detail that you create is
237
Creating a Detail from a Building Model
In this lesson, you detail the roof overhang of a project building.
In order to detail from the building model, you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. You define
that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In the callout view, you trace over the building model
geometry, add detail components, and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.
NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.
■ Select the corrugated metal component, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
■ Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.
■ Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point.
■ Click Modify.
21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component, and press DELETE.
TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.
Because you still have several components to load, you load them as a group from a single file.
34 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal, and place it in the
detail view as shown.
38 Click Modify.
39 Select the horizontal segment, click the Flip instance arrows, and click Modify.
The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.
NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.
Add insulation
43 Click Modify.
44 Move the upper segment:
■ Select the upper segment of insulation, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
■ Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point.
■ Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.
■ Click Modify.
52 Click Modify.
53 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244.
4 Click Modify.
5 Select the vertical plywood component; drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component.
9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist, as shown.
Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result.
16 On the Options Bar, select Chain, and draw the detail lines as shown.
21 In the drawing area, select the Penthouse level line, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.
22 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail), right-click Roof Overhang Detail, and click
Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Display Model, select Do not display, and click OK.
When you turn the display model off, the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in
this view. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added.
28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard, and then select the interior edge of
the horizontal segment.
TIP To rotate the break line as you place it, press SPACEBAR as necessary.
32 Click Modify.
33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask, select the
break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.
34 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Text Notes” on page 248.
6 Click Modify.
4 In the drawing area, select a text note, right-click, click Select All Instances, and press DELETE.
5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail; on the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection).
6 In the Filter dialog, clear Detail Items and Dimensions, and click OK.
The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.
7 Click Modify.
8 Zoom in to the metal coping; while pressing CTRL, select all the coping linework.
You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment, pressing TAB, and selecting the chain.
14 Click Modify.
15 Use a window to select all linework; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
16 Click Modify.
17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
18 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location; for File name, enter Roof Edge, and click Save.
19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail, and the component can be placed in the
detail.
NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail - Keynotes view is not the open view, double-click it in the Project Browser.
Adding Keynotes
In this exercise, you place keynotes on objects, and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated
with them.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
■ In the drawing area, select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.
■ Click to place the leader arm.
■ Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.
■ In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.B5, 63mm Rigid Insulation, and
click OK.
6 Click Modify.
7 In the drawing area, select the metal fascia with drip edge, and click (Properties).
8 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, for Identity Data ➤ Keynote, click in the Value column.
10 In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07645.F1, FasciaProfile_1.
11 Click OK 3 times.
12 On the Design Bar, click Keynote ➤ Element.
13 Tag components:
17 Keynote the component, using keynote 07460.A8, 22mm Corrugated Steel - 20 Ga.
18 Save the file.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254.
10 In the drawing area, select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.
40 Click Modify.
Add keynotes
■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.A9, and press ENTER.
■ Enter 07463.A1, and press TAB.
■ Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit, and press TAB.
■ Enter 07460.
3 In the text editor, click File menu ➤ Save, and close the text editor.
13 Click Modify.
14 Save the file.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail), right-click Drafting 1, and click
Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter EPDM Metal Coping, and click OK.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260.
5 Click Modify.
6 Select the callout, and use the callout grips to move the callout head.
7 In the Project Browser, right-click EPDM Metal Coping, and click Properties.
8 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename.
10 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Detail - No Reference, and click OK.
11 In the Type Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Reference Label, delete the existing value.
12 Click OK twice.
The callout head no longer displays a reference label.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Elev./Sect./Det.
15 Under Drafting Views (Detail - No Reference), drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.
16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.
17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.
The callout is updated with the sheet information.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
16 Select the left edge of the region, select the width dimension, and enter 20.5mm.
17 Click Modify.
18 While pressing CTRL, select the left and bottom edges of the region.
19 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
21 Select the filled region, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Mirror).
24 Select the mirrored region, and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.
35 Select all the linework for the wood region; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150:
■ Click (Pick).
■ For Offset, enter 6mm, and press ENTER.
45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.
You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.
■ Click (Draw).
■ For Offset, enter 0, and press ENTER.
■ Select Chain.
60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region.
61 Click Modify.
62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER.
63 Repeat for the right detail line.
68 Click Modify.
69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.
NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as
a guide.
74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the
50 x 150.
94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.
95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.
96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line.
TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.
Add dimensions
110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.
115 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click (Add Right Arc Leader).
116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.
documentation, including:
277
Using Note Blocks
In this lesson, you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.
19 On the toolbar, click (Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear Copy.
20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward
the building, as shown:
NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays,
and click.
Tag Text
B Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.
E Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.
H Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.
■ On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add.
■ Select Text, and click Add.
■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Tag.
26 Click OK.
The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.
30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand
the column to display the note text.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
32 Zoom in to see the note block.
■ On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add.
■ Select Sheet Name, and click Add.
■ On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does
not equal, and in the third field, enter T.
■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Sheet Number.
4 Click OK.
The drawing list displays.
Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two
most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component
legends.
Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that
identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.
Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On
construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame
schedule, and so on).
NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit
Architecture building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or
note block.
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol to
specify the text start point.
12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note.
13 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ Level Indicator
■ Door Tag
■ Window Tag
14 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A101 - Site Plan/Floor Plan.
15 In the Project Browser, expand Legends, click Typical Symbol Legend, drag it to the lower-right corner of
the sheet, and click to place it.
■ For Family, select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider.
■ For View, select Section.
■ For Host length, enter 900 mm, and press ENTER.
NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line, for example to force a line break between ''Wall
Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.''
15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.
20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.
21 In the Project Browser, right-click Sheets (all), and click New Sheet.
22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock.
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 4, and drag it to the new sheet.
24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet.
25 In the Project Browser, under Legends, select 4th Floor Wall Types, drag it onto the sheet, and click to place
it in the upper left corner of the sheet.
37 Optionally, click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type.
38 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Modify a wall
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 4.
2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.
8 In the drawing area, click near the partition you moved, and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment
of the revision cloud.
6 Click Load.
7 In the left pane of the dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision
Tag.rfa.
In the Tags dialog, notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds.
NOTE After you issue a revision, you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in
the drawing area, nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.
5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You can continue to add revisions.
On the Settings menu, click Revisions.
6 In the Revisions dialog, under Add, click New.
A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.
3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click to add text without a leader.
4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.
8 In the Revit Architecture window, with the new text box still selected, click Edit menu ➤ Paste from
Clipboard.
The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.
NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture.
Importing Spreadsheets
In this exercise, you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. The only
way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This process may vary from system to system.
This exercise demonstrates a common method.
The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site, as well as a large
lab building.
The large floor plan, or footprint, for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted
sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project, you break up the plan
303
Dependent view of lab building
Dataset
2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.
The dependent view opens.
3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK.
5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit.
6 In the drawing area, select the crop region.
7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out
the lab building.
8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the
drawing (the aviary).
■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the
second column of lab cubicles.)
■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.
■ Click above the left corner of the lab building.
■ Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.
■ Move the cursor left about 4800 mm, and click.
39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected.
40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.
41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs.
42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.
43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the
matchline.
NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.
NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference
for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.
49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag
for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.
50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.
52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views.
After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region
specifications to parallel views of the same scale.
53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK.
New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets.
54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1.
55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.
Dataset
2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.
The dependent view opens.
3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click
Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK.
5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.
20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet.
21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.
321
322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering
Viewing
9
In this tutorial, you learn to create and customize views of building information
models. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to
More specifically, you learn how to change the visibility of detail components,
how to control fill pattern colors, and how to use plan regions within floor plans
323
Viewing a Building Model
In this lesson, you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model.
You create elevations, sections, and three-dimensional (3D) views, and learn how to control the visibility of building
components and annotations within views.
TIP If the Project Browser does not display, on the Standard toolbar, click .
2 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click East.
A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. Both hidden lines
and window tags display in the east elevation view.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. The east elevation view displays
with hidden lines. This change is applied only to the active view, the east elevation. Notice that window
tags continue to display in the view.
10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand .
This means you are in pan mode.
11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area.
The view follows the movement of the cursor.
NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel, you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding
the middle wheel button down. Move the mouse to pan the view.
12 Press and hold CTRL, and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass .
This indicates that you are in zoom mode.
NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel, you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle
wheel.
13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen.
You can pan, zoom, and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog.
17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window, click X to close the view.
18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click My 3D View.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327.
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.
3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the
camera target point:
■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing, outside of the dimension lines.
■ Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building, as shown in the following illustration.
After you specify the second point (the view target), the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default
in a perspective view.
■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view.
■ Press and hold the left mouse button.
■ Move the cursor up, down, and sideways to see how the view changes.
■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view.
■ Press and hold the left mouse button.
■ Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward.
■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view.
■ Press and hold the left mouse button.
■ Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. You may need to reposition the view with
the other controls.
3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera.
18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties:
TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading.
25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model, as shown in the following
illustration.
Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. The box represents the extents
of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section.
5 To view the section, double-click the section head, or in the Project Browser, expand Sections, and
double-click Section 1.
NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the
fill pattern.
6 In the Project Browser, select the section view, right-click, and click Find Referring Views.
7 In the Go To View dialog, select Floor Plan: Level 1, and click Open View.
8 Select the section line, and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the
following illustration.
13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view, and select and move the section depth grip under the
lower wall.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
15 Double-click the section head to display the section view.
Notice the change in the view direction.
3 Without clicking in the drawing area, move the cursor around the building model.
Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model.
You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol.
6 To view the new elevation, zoom in, and double-click the elevation symbol arrow.
The elevation is named Elevation 1 - a by default.
9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view, Elevation 1 - b.
In addition, you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. This means that in views with a coarse
level of detail, such as the one below, you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type, in this case, a shade of gray.
Dataset
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D.
7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls.
The surface pattern of the brick is black.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339.
Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type
In this exercise, you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. You change the coarse scale fill pattern
from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are
displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Showroom.rvt.
Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339
Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall
4 Select the south arced wall, right-click, and click Element Properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
By default, the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none.
6 In the Type Properties dialog, click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field.
7 In the Color dialog, select a shade of gray, and click OK.
8 In the Type Properties dialog, click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click .
9 In the Fill Patterns dialog, select Solid fill for Name, and click OK three times.
10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture, refer to the online Help for more information.
Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan
view, it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan.
By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height, you can display the stepped portion of the walls
in the Level 1 floor plan.
Dataset
TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View.
Plan regions have a single property, view range, which is similar to the view range for plan views. You use
the view range property to control the cut plane, the top and bottom clip planes, and the view depth plane.
3 In the Level 1 view, sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance:
The plan region displays as a dashed green line. When you select the plan region, the line turns red.
7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane, enter 4000 for the Top Offset.
8 Click Apply, and then click OK twice.
9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration.
10 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your
building information model; to place and render decals to create signs, billboards,
345
Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender
Raytrace feature.
You learn to create and apply materials to a building model, add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site,
and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you select a scene that
defines the model environment, and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view.
■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building.
■ change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt.
■ define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall.
When you complete these changes, you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the floor, and
the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.
TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click the tab
in the context menu.
10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog, under _accurender, expand Masonry and click Brick.
11 Under Name, select Carib,200mm,Running.
12 Click OK twice.
You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step.
Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building.
14 On the Options Bar, verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector, and click .
15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
16 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, click Edit for Structure.
17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, click in the Material field that contains Default Floor, and click
.
18 In the Materials dialog, under Name, select Site - Asphalt.
19 Click OK four times.
Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions
31 In the Type Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click in the Material field, and then click
.
32 In the Materials dialog, under Name, select Aluminum, Polished.
33 Click OK three times.
This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model.
Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made
36 In the Scene Selection dialog, verify that New is selected, select Exterior under Type, and click OK.
37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene, click No.
38 On the Design Bar, click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building
model in hidden line wireframe.
39 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350.
In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the
season and location specified in the render scene settings.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site.
5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site, and click to place a tree.
Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the
following illustration.
7 In the Type Selector, select any of the deciduous trees, and click .
11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click in the Value field for Plant Name, and then click to
display the Plant Library.
12 In the Plant Library, under accurender, expand Trees and Shrubs, and click Deciduous.
13 Under Name, select Oak, Black, and click OK.
14 In the Type Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Black Oak for Type Comments.
15 Under Other, enter 7000mm for Plant Height, and click OK twice.
The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site.
16 Move the cursor to the building site, and place two black oak trees, as shown in the following illustration.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.
■ Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.
3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.
4 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective
view name), and click Show Camera.
5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.
The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. Cnst. view. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of
vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view.
6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in
the following illustration.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely.
14 Click OK.
15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, click Environment.
16 In the Environment dialog, under Background Color, verify that Automatic Sky is selected.
17 Under Advanced, select Ground Plane.
The Ground Plane tab displays.
18 Click Material.
19 In the Material Library, under _accurender, click Site.
20 In the Name list, select Grass, Rye, Dark.
21 Click OK twice.
22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Scene Settings, select Autumn for Plant Season.
23 Under Raytrace Settings, select Good for Quality, and click OK.
31 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Renderings, and double-click Exterior to display the
rendered view of the townhouse that you saved.
32 If you want to save this exercise, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
33 Proceed to the next lesson, “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358.
To create the rendered scene, you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor, define
the view and render scene settings, and finally, use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view.
Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render
1 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
Add a camera
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point:
■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.
The interior perspective is displayed, but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display
more of the view.
3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.
10 On the View toolbar, click to display the 3D view of the building model.
11 On the View menu, click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it.
12 On the View menu, click View Properties.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK.
A section box is displayed around the building model.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the section box.
Grips are displayed on the section box.
15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you
want to render is visible.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364.
TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes.
19 Click Material.
20 In the Material Library, under accurender, click Site.
21 In the Name list, select Grass, Rye, Dark.
22 Click OK twice.
23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog, under Use View’s Section Box, select {3D}.
24 Under Scene Settings, select Summer for Plant Season, and click OK.
25 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365.
8 On the Options Bar, select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution, and click .
The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people.
9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
10 Close the exercise file.
By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial, you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You
learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine.
The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path, which is the path that a camera will follow
through your building model. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view, but you can also define it in a
3D, elevation, or section view. The walkthrough path is a spline, and you create it by specifying points that create the
spline. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are
created between the key frames. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. In a plan
view, you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path.
Recording a Walkthrough
After you create a walkthrough, you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with
any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software. When you export your walkthrough to an
AVI, you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough:
■ Wireframe
■ Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines)
■ Shaded or Shaded with Edges
■ AccuRender (Raytrace)
IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option, you must select or define a scene.
Creating a Walkthrough
In this exercise, you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.
You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse, proceeds through the dining room, and
ends in the far corner of the living room.
Dataset
NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use Metric values, click Settings ➤ Project
Units, and change unit formats as desired.
TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click the tab
in the context menu.
3 On the Options Bar, verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view.
4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room, and click to specify the start point, or the first
key frame, of the walkthrough.
5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the
following illustration.
6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room, on the Options Bar, click
7 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Walkthroughs, and double-click Walkthrough 1.
8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips.
If it is not, select the crop boundary.
Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.
9 On the Options Bar, click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.
10 In the Crop Region Size dialog, enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height.
11 Under Change, verify Field of view is selected, and click OK.
12 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x), and select the crop boundary.
14 Click .
17 Click .
The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.
18 When the walkthrough stops playing, proceed to the next exercise, “Changing the Walkthrough Path and
Camera Position” on page 370.
5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip), and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the
following illustration.
Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera
displays at a slightly different location.
9 On the Options Bar, click Edit Walkthrough, and then click to play the walkthrough.
10 Proceed to the next exercise, “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372.
NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. If you are unsure of what
option to use, the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. It produces files that are larger
than compressed files, but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality.
6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3, without
opening Revit Architecture 2008.
for creating sustainable designs. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of
shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Interior solar
studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building
In this tutorial, you create interior and exterior views of a building information
model to be used in solar studies that you define. You specify settings for summer
and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the
More specifically, you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a
building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during
the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.
375
Creating Views for Solar Studies
In this lesson, you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.
■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.
■ A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.
■ A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 01 Entry.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click
in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point, as shown.
A 3D view is created. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because
of minor variations in camera placement.
Create section
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house, as shown.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, right-click Section 1, and click Rename.
8 In the Rename View dialog, enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway, and click OK.
NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse, some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid
and do not cast a shadow. In some cases, changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study.
17 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
18 On the File menu, click Save.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379.
NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Typical plan views, such as floor
plans and ceiling plans, do not display many elements in 3D, so no shadows will be cast from these elements.
Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.
Create callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site, including the
house, as shown.
9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog, and under Orient to a View, select Floor Plan:
Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.
10 In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to
view the front side, as shown.
17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.
18 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
19 In the Rename View dialog, enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway, and click OK.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level ➤ Fine.
21 On the File menu, click Save.
22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in
this lesson:
7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Click the Single-Day tab.
8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA is selected, and click Duplicate.
9 In the Name dialog, enter Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and click OK.
11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, for City, click , select Los Angeles, CA, USA, and click OK.
Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project.
NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset, you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study.
14 In this case, you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Clear Ground
Plane at Level.
15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, confirm that Summer Solstice, Los Angeles is selected, and click
Duplicate.
16 In the Name dialog, enter Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and click OK.
17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, for Date, select December 22, 2006, and click OK.
18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
19 On the File menu, click Save.
20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383.
3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.
7 On the Options Bar, under Frame, you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation:
8 On the Options Bar, click the control buttons to preview the animation:
NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
13 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study.
NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Sketching the
living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor
plan helps to determine the best layout.
5 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.
7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, verify that Cast Shadows is selected.
13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang, as
shown.
14 Click outside of the section box, and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area, if necessary.
15 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
Export as AVI
■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop.
■ For File name, enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway - Los Angeles.
■ For Save as type, select AVI Files.
■ Under Output Length, select Frame range, and enter 5 to 50.
■ For Frames per second, verify that the value is set to 15.
■ Under Format, for Model Graphics Style, verify that Hidden Line is selected.
■ For Dimensions, enter 450 in the first field (width), and click in the second field (height) to see the
value dynamically changed.
To maintain the proportions of the frame, you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated
automatically. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions.
NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. The AVI can then typically be played from
within the zip file.
Export as PNG
1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.
NOTE When you export to PNG, or any single-frame format, such as JPEG, TIFF, BMP, or GIF, it is recommended
that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files, depending on the Frame
Range. In this example, the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop.
3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts, as shown.
5 Select the roof, and on the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.
Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.
6 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar:
9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Multi-Day tab.
11 Select Multi Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA, and click Duplicate.
12 In the Name dialog, for File name enter 2pm - Los Angeles - Week Interval, and click OK.
13 Specify values for the multi-day study:
16 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, select Full Frames (Uncompressed), and click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.
NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting, so you may need to make your own adjustment for
specific studies. For example, to see the sun at its highest point on June 22, you would set the time to 1:00 PM
rather than 12:00 PM.
NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North
before you can change the angle value.
19 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.
20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh.
Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North.
24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Single-Day tab, click Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
27 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected, and
click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.
28 Once you are finished with the study, it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project
North for documentation and annotation purposes:
NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for
this project.
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.
2 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click each of the following views to review the available
views for rendering:
■ to house from SW
■ to west facade of house
■ living area
This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room.
■ On the Options Bar, for Scene, select Winter solstice 2pm in LA.
■ On the Options Bar, for Resolution, select Draft (75 dpi).
■ On the Options Bar, click GO.
The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution.
NOTE Rendered views are temporary, so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project.
7 Review some captured images of the building. In the Project Browser, under Renderings, double-click each
of the following images:
the accuracy of the content. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are
intended to describe number, length, type, and other quantifiable elements within
the context of contract documents. There remain many options in the software
that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective
complexity of the work. To express texture beyond material specifics, and line
In Revit Architecture, there are several options for expressing the architecture.
They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering, Advanced Model Graphics,
the Linework Tool, and Section Boxes. There are two directions you can choose
exercises, you explore the stylistic approach. For the realistic approach, tutorials
In this tutorial, you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned
relationship among plans, sections, elevations, and details. You can use the
397
building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building model,
Dataset
Modify visibility/graphics
TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active, exit the menu, click in the drawing area, and click View
menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.
5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation
categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all tags, dimensions, sections, elevations, and so on in this view.
NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.
8 Click OK.
Notice that no annotations display in this view.
9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area, click the Scale control and select 1:100.
Notice the immediate change in the line weights; this represents the view getting smaller.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view.
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Still tab, select Sun and Shadow Settings.
5 Under Settings, select By Date, Time and Place.
7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click the Place tab.
8 Select Boston, MA, USA for City, and click OK.
9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time.
10 Select Ground Plane at Level, and select 1st Flr. Cnst.
This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.
11 Click OK.
12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This gives the plan depth and creates a
sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.
13 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Sun and Shadows Settings, click .
15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, under Settings, clear Ground Plane at Level, and click OK.
This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.
TIP If the View tab is not available, right-click the Design Bar, and click View.
2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, select Arch Portrait, and click OK.
Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented.
5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown, and click to place it.
For this analytique, you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish this, you
will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view.
Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region, you must define the inner perimeter
by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model.
TIP Use care when sketching this chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details, and you should
take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. If necessary, use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or
overlapping intersections.
TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines, create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide
lines. When you are finished drawing the chain, select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back
to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector.
26 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Fill Pattern, click .
2 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click Copy of South, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation South Elevation, and click OK.
TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active, exit the menu, click in the drawing area, and click View
menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.
5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, on the Model Categories tab, under Visibility, click in the Walls
row. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls, click Override.
6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, under Pattern Overrides, clear Visible, and click OK.
This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.
7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, under Visibility, scroll up, expand the Doors category, and clear
Elevation Swing.
8 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.
9 Click OK.
10 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view.
11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style.
12 Under Shadow Properties, select Cast Shadows.
13 Under Intensity, specify 35 for Shadow.
TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.
6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation
floor plan.
7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.
5 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Section 2.
To fit correctly in the analytique, this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. To accomplish this, you will
create a callout around the building model components within the section view.
TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections
(Callout 1).
10 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), right-click Callout of Section 2, and click Rename.
11 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Section 2, and click OK.
12 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Section 2.
■ Casework
■ Ceilings
■ Furniture
■ Lighting Fixtures
■ Specialty Equipment
19 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.
20 Click OK.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view.
TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of
the section line in the previous exercise.
8 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
10 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.
NOTE The line style, Silhouette Edges, was added to this dataset for training purposes. You can modify this line
style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu.
Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model.
TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Using a clock as a reference, specify 3 o’clock as the
rotation start point.
11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise, and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of
rotation, and press ENTER.
12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as
shown.
14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport, and drag it up and to the left as shown.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
5 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), right-click Section 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), right-click Copy of Section 1, and click Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Section 1, and click OK.
Now, rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique, you can simply apply the
presentation view template.
Create callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), double-click Section 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.
After you add the callout, click Modify, select the callout, and modify the extents and the callout head
location as shown.
4 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), right-click Callout of Section 1, and click Rename.
5 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Callout, and click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Callout.
The composition set for the analytique is now complete. In the steps that follow, you add a heavy base to
the floors and a poche to the base. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas
of contrast, the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout.
21 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Callout.
22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
23 On the Design Bar, click Region Properties.
24 In the Element Properties dialog, select Solid Black for Type, and click OK.
25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar, sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.
Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished.
You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. You do not have to replicate the image
exactly. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized
representation of the architectural forms.
29 On the Options Bar, click , and sketch the rectangle shown below.
4 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, specify the following:
■ Select Directly.
■ Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees.
■ Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees.
■ Select Relative to View.
■ Select Ground Plane at Level.
■ Select 1st Flr. Cnst. in the list.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
11 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.
12 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric, and click Rename.
13 In the Rename View dialog, enter Isometric 1, and click OK.
14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric 1, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Copy of Isometric 1, and click Rename.
16 In the Rename View dialog, enter Isometric 2, and click OK.
TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. You can use this to rotate the section box.
21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box, and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway
through the second floor as shown.
When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar.
Before turning off the visibility of the section box, make a duplicate of the view.
22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
23 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Copy of Isometric 2, and click Rename.
NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box, the stairs and railings may display.
In such a case, either adjust the plane location, or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the
Visibility/Graphics dialog.
36 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and, in the
Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
Notice the filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown, and specify the range and direction just
outside the upper right corner of the building model.
4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it.
5 On the View Control Bar, click the Advanced Model Graphics control, and click Advanced Model Graphics.
6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, specify the following:
13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the
following image. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well.
16 In the Crop Region Size dialog, under Change, select Scale (locked proportions).
17 Under Model Crop Size, enter 165 mm for Width, and click OK.
18 To hide the crop region, click View menu ➤ View Properties. Clear Crop Region Visible, and click OK.
19 To hide the section box, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab, clear
Section Boxes, and click OK.
443
444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting
Exporting to Autodesk
3ds Max or VIZ 13
In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to
analysis.
provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most
For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ.
NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your
system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier
version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.
445
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the
building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data
to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene.
NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any
changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it.
After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials
that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some
minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.
Dataset
■ Click Options.
4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK.
The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple
sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple
polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended
that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids.
7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the
tutorial.
Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making
changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export
only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close.
9 Click File menu ➤ New.
10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK.
11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.
13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.
17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab.
18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected.
This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the
DWG file.
19 Click Cancel.
20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File.
21 In the Open dialog:
■ Click OK.
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current.
The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current.
28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera:
To Building.
NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render
window, click .
33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click (Get Material).
34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.
All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with
the elements display in the right pane of the browser.
35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.
36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK.
37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click (Pick Material from Object).
■ In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera.
40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System.
41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.
42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose.
43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.
44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click (Modify).
45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup.
46 Under Location, click Get Location.
47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK.
48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250.
49 Under Time:
50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed.
51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color
to a sky blue color.
After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain
wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport.
Dataset
■ Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.
9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.
18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click (Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection
set name.
19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.
20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties.
21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab.
22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.
Dataset
■ Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max.
to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the
SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been
In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an
After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front
mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such
459
460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place
mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.
TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the
context menu that displays.
■ Click Open.
13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.
NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces)
will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs.
18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.
on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)
7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected.
This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.
16 On the View toolbar, click to turn off the mass visibility in the view, and display only the roofs that
you created.
18 On the View toolbar, click , and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form.
22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below.
29 Using the same technique, create the 2 curtain systems shown below.
TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall, select the other wall, press TAB
until the desired wall highlights, and select it.
37 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face, and select the mass face shown below.
38 On the View toolbar, click to view the building that you have created.
The perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips
display.
43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building, and click in the drawing area to
hide the grips.
44 On the View toolbar, click to view only the walls, roofs, and curtain systems that make up your building
in the view.
45 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left curtain system in the view.
48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.
55 On the View toolbar, click , and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building.
56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Door.
57 In the Type Selector, verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays.
58 Add doors to the building as shown below.
473
474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families
About Families and the
Family Editor 15
All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based.” The term family
manage your data and make changes easily. Each family element can have multiple
types defined within it, each with a different size, shape, material set, or other
parameter variables as designed by the family creator. Even though various types
within a family can look completely different, they are still related and come from
a single source, thus the term family. Changes to a family type definition ripple
through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family
or type within the project. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the
In this tutorial, you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor.
475
Using Families and the Family Editor
One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without
having to learn a complex programming language. Using the Family Editor, you create a family within predefined
templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. You provide the information
necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry.
In this lesson, you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are
created. You also learn about the Family Editor, and when and how to use it.
Introduction to Families
Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an .rfa extension. All different types that
you create are stored with the master family file. For example, if you create a family called "double-hung window" that
includes types with several sizes, the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project.
This makes file management much easier, because there is only one file to track. There are, however, exceptions to this
rule. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the
project environment. Walls, floors, and roofs are examples of these types of families. In addition, there is another type
of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture
recognize it as a particular component type, such as a dome roof.
Revit Architecture has three types of families:
■ System
■ Standard Component
■ In-place
System Families
System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls,
floors, and roofs. The basic walls system family, for example, has wall types that define interior, exterior, foundation,
generic, and partition wall styles. You can duplicate and modify existing system families, but you cannot create new
system families.
NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another.
The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family.
Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates, while many more are stored in component
libraries. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. You can either duplicate and modify an
existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates.
Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Host-based families have components that require hosts. An
example is a door family hosted by a wall family. Standalone families include columns, trees, and furniture. Family
templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families.
Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an .rfa extension. You can load
them into projects, transfer them from one project to another, and save them from a project file to your library if
needed.
In-place Families
In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. You create in-place families only
within the current project, so they are useful for objects unique to that project; for example, custom wall treatments.
You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families, and the category that you use determines the
component’s appearance and display control within the project.
The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family.
In this section, you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. In the final
exercise, you learn about the Family Editor, how to access it, and when to use it.
During the design process, you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design.
In this case, presume it is a bay window that you require. There is a logical thought process that you should follow:
1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so, it should be available within the Type
Selector.
2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project, you can search the component library loaded on your local
hard drive. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network.
3 Next, consider checking the web library and other web resources, such as newsgroups.
4 If you can’t find the component you require, you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles
it. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. If you
find a close match, open it in the Family Editor, modify it as needed, and then load it into the project.
5 Finally, if you have exhausted your external resources, you should create a new component family using one of
the family templates as a starting point.
You can access the Family Editor in several ways. With Revit Architecture open, you can click File ➤ Open, navigate
to a family file, and click Open. When the family opens, it opens within the Family Editor. This will be apparent because
the only Design Bar tab available is Family.
Within the Windows® environment, you can double-click any file with an .rfa extension and it will open Revit
Architecture in the Family Editor. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously.
To start a new family, click File ➤ New ➤ Family, select the appropriate template, and click Open.
In each lesson, you learn how to create a different type of component. Using the
installed templates, you start with a simple door family and then move onto a
window family. You create a furniture family, a lighting fixture, and several
annotation families. In addition, you create an in-place family. When you create
an in-place family, you create it within the project file, not within the Family
Editor. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.
479
Creating 3D Geometry
All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. There are four different methods to create
Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion, Blend, Revolve, and Sweep.
Solids and Voids are sketch based. When you are in sketch mode, you can no longer select or modify an element that
is not in the sketch. To quit the sketch mode, click Finish Sketch on the Design bar.
■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. There
can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other.
■ Blend: A blend contains two sketches, Base and Top, both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection
between the sketch lines. Each sketch is set to a different height. The sketches must not touch or intersect each
other.
■ Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. The
start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. The sample below shows a start
angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°.
■ Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open, and a Profile that must be a closed
loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile.
When a void is placed on a solid, it automatically cuts the solid. If you place the void before you add the solid, use the
Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool.
You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar:
■ Join Geometry
■ Unjoin Geometry
■ Cut Geometry
■ Don’t Cut
Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family,
and pin those reference planes.
Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views.
Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters.
Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template, create different host types for testing purposes.
Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters.
Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types; if the family includes a host, switch between the different
host types.
Note that no geometry is created; tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly.
Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes.
Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete; continue to incrementally add reference planes, build
geometry, and test after each step.
Step 11: Test the family in a project environment.
5 While pressing CTRL, select both reference planes; on the Edit toolbar, click to pin the reference planes.
6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back), and on the Options Bar, click .
7 In the Element Properties dialog, verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected, and click OK.
8 Using the same method, verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane,
and click OK.
The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in
plan view.
3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane, and create one to the
right.
You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views.
5 Select the left reference plane and, on the Options Bar, click .
6 In the Element Properties dialog, for Identity Data ➤ Name, enter Left, and click OK.
Not a Reference The reference plane can be used in a family, but cannot be accessed
in a project for alignment or dimensioning. The reference does not
snap and shows no shape handles.
Weak Reference The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or
dimensioning. The reference allows minor strength snapping. Shape
handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance
parameter.
Strong Reference The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or
dimensioning. When you dimension a family and a strong and a
weak reference are close together, the strong reference is always
captured first. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping.
Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an
instance parameter.
Directional References These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for
example, left, right, top). If a reference plane defines the left edge
of a family, use Left for the Is Reference value. These behave the same
as strong references.
According to these rules, define the priorities of the reference planes you have created.
1 Select the Left reference plane, and on the Options Bar, click .
2 In the Element Properties dialog, for Other ➤ Is Reference, select Left, and click OK.
Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string.
15 Using the Element Properties dialog, name them Base Left, Base Right, Base Front, and Base Back.
Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments, you need to specify
the Is Reference values.
16 While pressing CTRL, click the base reference planes, and click .
17 In the Element Properties dialog, for Other ➤ Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK.
Now the reference planes can be used in the family, but do not appear in the project. Position and dimension
the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes.
18 Click the Base Left reference plane, enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension, and press ENTER.
35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane.
36 Click Modify.
37 Select the last dimension added; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
38 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
39 Click File menu ➤ Save, navigate to Training/Metric/Families, and save the file as Cabinet.rfa.
In the next exercise, you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog.
NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes, click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog
and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible.
5 Using the same method, create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800.
6 In the Family Types dialog:
7 Click Apply.
Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values.
NOTE In the Family Types dialog, clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog; clicking OK
adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog.
8 Using the same method, create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800.
9 In the Family Types dialog:
10 Click Apply.
11 Click OK.
you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar.
Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for
existing geometry in a drawing. In that case, select the geometry, and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar.
Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode, there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to
Set Work Plane. This option will display the Work Plane dialog, where you can define the plane.
Creating Geometry
In this lesson, you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. You constrain the extrusions to the
reference planes you created in previous exercises.
Sketch an extrusion
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.
NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. When the
setup is more complex, with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool, do not
sketch directly on the reference planes. You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired
reference planes.
NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference
plane and lock it.
20 Click Modify.
21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar, click Visibility.
22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP, and click OK.
23 Save the file.
NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. Click Modify, select the symbolic line, and
click the locks to create the constraint.
7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner, and lock the geometry.
8 While pressing CTRL, select both lines and, on the Options Bar, click Visibility.
9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog, under Detail Levels, clear Coarse, and click OK.
The lines are greyed out, as the current displayed detail level is Coarse.
13 Click OK.
14 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.
Save a 3D view
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D views, double-click View 1.
This opens a predefined 3D view.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.
3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest.
Create a project
10 In the Project Browser, under Cabinet, drag each of the types into the drawing area, and click to place
them. You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type.
11 Click Modify.
14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.
NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. Because labelled dimensions
are parameters, a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change
accordingly.
20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it, along with the witness line controls, so it
doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location, as shown.
TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar, click the down arrow
button, and select the command from the menu.
When drawing an arc from center and end points, you first specify the arc center, then you specify each
end point.
24 Enter SI, and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point.
25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point.
26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint.
In the image below, the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503.
TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion, use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion
reference, then click to specify the dimension witness line.
22 Proceed to the next exercise, “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click for Material.
11 In the Materials dialog, under Name, select Oak Door, and click OK.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material.
20 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click View 1.
21 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame.
27 Click OK.
28 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining New Door Types” on page 508
11 Click OK.
You now have three new door types defined within your door family.
You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. This completes the lesson,
Creating a Door Family.
Change the height and width values again, and click Apply. Notice how the window opening adapts to
the changing dimension values. This process is called “flexing the model,” and it is done to avoid conflicts
and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed.
9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width, and click Apply.
This is the starting point for the new window.
10 Click OK.
11 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513.
The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane.
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the reference plane.
28 Select the left edge of the frame section, and drag it to the interior face of the wall. When the lock displays,
click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face.
TIP After adding the dimension, click Modify, select the line you want to move, and specify the dimension value.
32 Select the 40 mm dimension. When the lock displays, click the lock to constrain the present value.
TIP If you don’t see the lock icon, zoom out until it displays.
33 Select the 20 mm dimension. When the lock displays, click the lock to constrain the present value.
38 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click View 1.
If necessary, spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame.
5 On the Options Bar, click , and enter - 45 mm for Depth, and select Lock.
6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame, press TAB to cycle through the selection options, and select
the option, Chain of walls or lines.
■ Click .
■ Enter - 50 mm for Offset.
You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.
■ Click .
8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle, and then
specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521.
16 On the Options Bar, click , enter -12 mm for Depth, and select Lock.
17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary.
NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. After the family is loaded into a project, you can
control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog.
NOTE After flexing the model, it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as
expected. For example, make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion
remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems
early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines.
28 On the Edit toolbar, click to return the window to its original dimensions.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the
mullion centerline locations as shown.
NOTE When you draw each reference plane, the exact location is not critical. Precise dimensions are assigned
to the reference planes in subsequent steps.
5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference
plane below it, as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.
6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal
reference plane above it, as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.
TIP Due to the length of the dimension label, you may want to drag the dimension value as shown.
25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension you added in the previous step.
30 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter> for Label.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following parameters:
NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.
■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality
constraint.
■ Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges.
■ Select the dimension, and on the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label.
Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. This is changed in later steps.
35 In the Family Types dialog, enter 40 mm for Mullion Width, and click Apply.
Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters, and the mullions stretch with the new window
height.
NOTE After flexing the model, it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as
expected. In this case, you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered,
evenly spaced, and aligned with the sash edge. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems
early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines, or undoing the same.
37 Click Cancel.
38 On the Edit toolbar, click to return the window to its original dimensions.
44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown, and
then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash.
49 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension you added in the previous step.
51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane
as shown. Remember, follow these basic steps:
NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.
■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality
constraint.
■ Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges.
■ Select the dimension, and on the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label.
56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area, so when you open the Family Types
dialog, you can still see the window.
57 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
58 In the Family Types dialog, do the following:
Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window
height.
59 Click Cancel.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame, sash, and mullions
TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions.
The window frame, sash, mullions, and glass display their assigned materials.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, “Defining New Window Types” on page 540.
4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry, it is also a good
idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied.
In the Family Types dialog, verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height, and click Apply.
5 In the Family Types dialog, enter 1000 mm for Height, and click Apply.
You now have three new window types defined within your window family.
17 On the Standard toolbar, click to start a new project based on your default template.
18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Window.
19 On the Options Bar, click Load.
Before you start to create a complex model family, you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the
desired behavior:
■ Subcategories: Solid geometry, model lines, and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. This
allows you to drive lineweights, line colors, line patterns, and materials of the subcategories. You can also switch
on/off selected subcategories in a project.
■ Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you
the correct plan, elevation, and section views of a family.
■ Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion, Solid
Blend, Solid Revolve, Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. For
example, the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame
edges in an elevation view of the family.
■ Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. Model lines are displayed in every view, where
symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have
been created.
■ Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. Basically, a parameter drives geometry in a
family. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. Instance parameter
means, that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter, where type parameters
drive the geometry for each family type. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family.
■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned.
■ By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project.
■ By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family.
■ By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in
the family.
■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework, you can use a parameter
with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No.
The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan, Section, and Elevation views. Various
parameters drive the behavior of the family.
Detail Level
Plan
Section
Elevation
Additionally, you should define different widths for each of the casements, and should account for instances when
either of the casements is toggled off.
■ A: Insertion depth
■ B: Frame depth
■ C: Frame width
■ D: Sash width
■ E: Center post width
■ F: Wall offset
■ G: Left width
■ H: Right width
■ I: Width
■ J: Wall offset top
■ K: Top frame height
■ L: Bottom frame height
■ M: Height
■ Outer sill:
1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane, and on the Options Bar, click .
2 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, select Defines Origin, and click OK.
TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted; refer to the command line to verify what is selected.
5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane; in the Edit toolbar, click .
TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted; refer to the status bar to verify what is selected.
14 Using the same method, drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side.
The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left
and right edges of the wall offset for the opening.
19 Select the dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
20 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
This parameter is defined as an instance parameter, because each inserted value should have a different
insertion depth. Next, dimension the vertical reference planes.
27 Using the same method, dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes.
28 Select the dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Wall Offset.
The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. Next, you apply the same method to
reference planes in an elevation view.
NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes.
NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion
Edge, Interior, Right, and Left reference planes.
15 Using the same method, align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and
Sill reference planes.
In order to use the voids as a new opening, you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. Also,
the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry.
20 Using the same method, cut the second void from the wall.
Next, you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters.
Note that the opening has changed correctly. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and
thicknesses.
14 Select the right dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
15 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
16 Select the left dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Frame Width.
17 Using the same method, create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane, name
it Frame Interior, and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown.
19 Using the same method used previously, name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right,
dimension the planes at 120mm, and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension.
NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise.
27 Using the same method, create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane,
name it Frame Top, and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm.
28 Select the lower dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
29 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
30 Select the other dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
Before you model the frame geometry, add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether
the parameters work correctly.
39 Click Apply.
Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions.
40 Under Name, select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200, and click OK.
44 On the Options Bar, click , and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown.
NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left, one on the right, and a third rectangle outside the intersection of
the reference planes.
NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes.
Left Frame Top, Frame Bottom, Frame Right, Center Post Right.
Right Frame Top, Frame Bottom, Center Post Left, Frame Left.
■ Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane, and lock the alignment.
■ Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane, and lock the alignment.
51 Click Modify.
56 Click OK twice.
57 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.
The window frame is complete. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial.
3 On the Views toolbar, click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights.
4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown.
5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created, and click .
6 In the Element Properties dialog:
7 Using the same method, specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes, working from left
to right:
8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown; specify
each dimension as 50mm.
9 Select the left dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Add Parameter.
10 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
11 Select the next dimension; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Sash Width.
12 Using the same method, add parameters to the remaining dimensions.
You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip.
22 Select the Sash Top reference plane; for the temporary dimension, enter 50mm.
23 While pressing CTRL, select both dimensions; on the Options Bar, for Label, select Sash Width.
The skeleton of the window sash is complete. Before you model the sash geometry, extend the 2 window
types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly.
28 For Name, select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200, and click OK.
30 On the Options Bar, click , and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown.
Outside Frame Top, Frame Bottom, Center Post Right, Frame Right.
Inside Sash Top, Sash Bottom, Sash Right Left, Sash Right Right.
NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view.
■ Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane, and lock the alignment.
■ Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane, and lock the alignment.
40 Click Modify.
41 Using the same method, switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left
sash.
42 Switch back to the Ref. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash.
47 Click OK twice.
1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash, and click .
2 In the Element Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Visible, click the rectangular button on the right side.
3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, click Add parameter.
4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
5 Click OK 3 times.
6 Using the same method, create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left.
7 On the Design Bar, click Family Types; note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the
Value column.
8 For Name, select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400, and click Apply.
9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200.
10 Under Construction, clear Sash Left, and click OK.
NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor; the geometry is only
greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned.
4 On the Options Bar, click , and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown.
13 Using the same method, dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch, and create a Glass Height Right
parameter.
Assign properties
18 Click OK twice.
19 Using the same method, create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height
Left and Glass Length Left.
20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right.
Addition +
Subtraction -
Multiplication *
Division /
Logarithm log
Sine sin
Cosine cos
Tangent tan
Arcsine asin
Arccosine acos
Arctangent atan
Simple IF - OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 , B = 3 ) , 8 , 3 )
Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' , 2' 6" , IF ( Length < 45' , 3' , IF ( Length < 55' , 5' , 8' ) ) )
IF - "A" is less than or equal to "B":
IF ( NOT ( A > B ) , 8 , 3 )
Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B)
NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. This would overconstrain the family. The width
of the right sash will be determined using formulas.
11 In the Family Types dialog, for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula, enter the formula to get the
calculated width:
(Width - Width Sash Left) - (Frame Width * 2) - Center Post Width
12 Press ENTER.
The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width, Width Sash Left,
Frame Width, and Center Post Width. The value is greyed out, and cannot be changed in the Family Types
dialog.
■ Click Apply.
■ Click Apply.
17 For Name, select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200, and click OK.
■ Under Other, in the Formula row for Glass Length Right, enter if(Sash Right, (Width Sash Right
- 2 * Sash Width), Width Sash Right).
■ In the Formula row for Glass Length Left, enter if(Sash Left, (Width Sash Left - 2 * Sash Width),
Width Sash Left).
■ In the Formula row for Glass Height Right, enter if(Sash Right, (Height - Frame Height Top -
Frame Height Bottom - 2 * Sash Width), Height - Frame Height Top - Frame Height
Bottom).
■ In the Formula row for Glass Height Left, enter if(Sash Left, (Height - Frame Height Top - Frame
Height Bottom - 2 * Sash Width), Height - Frame Height Top - Frame Height Bottom).
20 Click OK.
The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. You can test the
formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog.
13 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side, and click .
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Visible, select the rectangular button on the right
side.
15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Sash Right.
16 Click OK twice.
17 Using the same method, associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter.
18 Save the file.
9 Click OK.
10 Save the file.
8 Click OK.
13 Click OK.
Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family.
The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.
4 In the Parameter Properties dialog, for Construction ➤ Sill Length, in the Formula column, enter Width
- 2* Wall Offset.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill, double-click Concrete Sill.
TIP If the sill does not display, click and spin the wall.
15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, for Group parameter under, select Constraints, and select Instance.
16 Click OK twice.
TIP If the sill does not display, click and spin the wall.
14 In the Schedule Properties dialog, add the fields Mark, Width, Height, and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields
list, and click OK.
Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table.
The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template; they represent the furniture
centerline axes.
NOTE When you draw the reference planes, their exact location is not critical. Precise dimensions are assigned
to the reference planes in subsequent steps.
7 Draw two horizontal reference planes, one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference
plane as shown.
11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. It should reference the
left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.
17 To the right of the dimension you just created, add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference
plane to the lower reference plane, as shown.
TIP To do this, select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. Afterwards, select each
dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed.
These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Therefore, you should flex
the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected.
29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area, so when you open the Family Types
dialog, you can still see the model.
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
31 In the Family Types dialog, do the following:
Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. When the solid geometry is snapped
to the reference planes, it will also adapt to the same changes.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591.
NOTE In the image below, the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Your lines may have
a lighter weight.
14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm.
15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop, press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in
the Status Bar, and select the bottom edge.
16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick.
19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.
28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area, so when you open the Family Types dialog, you
can still see the model.
29 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
30 In the Family Types dialog, do the following:
31 In the Family Types dialog, return the parameters to their original values:
32 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Lock the dimension
as shown.
15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes.
TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. You can also highlight the entire line chain,
using the TAB key.
24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown.
25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.
■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base, and then
click the lock icon to lock the dimension.
■ Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base, and then click
the lock icon to lock the dimension.
29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion.
30 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter...> for Label.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog, you
can still see the model.
49 In the Family Types dialog, return the parameters to their original values:
50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
TIP You may need to click the down arrow button, and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu.
15 Select the left vertical sketch line, the upper sketch line, and then move the cursor down and to the right
until you create and arc similar to the image below. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of
the arc radius.
Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases
20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base, select the right edge of the rolltop, and click the lock icon.
22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog,
you can still see the model.
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
24 In the Family Types dialog, do the following:
The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that
did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical.
NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base
width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the
dimensions, zoom the view until you do.
14 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the
drawer set on the left.
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click for Material.
24 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate.
25 In the New Material dialog, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK.
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog,
you can still see the model.
33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
34 In the Family Types dialog, do the following:
The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that
did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints.
35 In the Family Types dialog, return the parameters to their original values:
36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612.
13 On the Standard toolbar, click to start a new project based on your default template.
You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the
Creating a Furniture Family lesson.
Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.
The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at
the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles
for the baluster are also displayed.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster
profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately
30mm wide by 60mm deep.
15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa.
The new custom baluster is now complete.
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep
profile should begin at the reference plane intersection.
2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.
3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa.
The new sweep profile is now complete.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of
the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane.
3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa.
The new rail profile is now complete.
Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template.
The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical
reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.
Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must
draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide
with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the
riser face reference plane.
3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as
shown.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa.
The new stair nosing profile is now complete.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the
reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body
(to the right of the wall face reference plane).
3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa.
The new reveal profile is now complete.
Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open.
NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the
host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn
outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane).
3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa.
The new host sweep profile is now complete.
8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.
9 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path.
NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical.
10 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.
18 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
22 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit.
23 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click .
24 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following:
25 Click OK.
26 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.
8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep.
9 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected.
10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.
11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.
Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile.
The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.
20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location.
21 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Ceiling Finish, and click OK.
22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location.
23 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Area, and click OK.
24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.rfa.
The new room tag is now ready for use.
Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template
1 In the Project Browser, notice that there is only one view available.
The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Notes included with
the template specify annotation parameters.
8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.
9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.
15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper vertical line.
16 In the Type Selector, select North Line.
17 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
19 Save the new north arrow with the name, Training North Arrow.rfa.
The titleblock has linework, text, and labels. You customize the titleblock with a new text style, graphics, and your
project data.
10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown.
11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown.
17 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the last text note.
18 Select the drag handle, and drag the text note down as shown.
■ Consultant:
■ Address:
■ Address:
■ Telephone:
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the consultant text note.
27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.
43 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Project Issue Date, and click OK.
The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines.
44 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field, and click to specify the label location.
48 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Checked By and click OK.
NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field, and click to specify the label
location.
64 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Project Name, and click OK.
65 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field, and click to specify the label
location.
67 In the Select Parameter dialog, select Client Name, and click OK.
68 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.rfa.
The titleblock graphics, text, and labels are now complete.
16 Click OK.
NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. To change the units of measurement to meters,
on the Settings menu, click Project Units. Set the Length units to millimeters, set the Area to Square meters, format the Area
to use 2 decimal places, and set the suffix to None.
2 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
10 In the Go To View dialog, select Section: Wall Section - Center, and click Open View.
Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form
The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.
The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.
21 Snap to reference plane intersections, and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse
C as shown.
25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.
The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point.
9 In the Go To View dialog, select Section: Wall Section - Center, and click Open View.
NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.
16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm, and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.
17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the
floor profile as shown.
Category: None
Category: None
Casework wall based Family template for casework. Contains sample wall geometry. Wall
based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.
Category: Casework
Casework Family template for casework. Geometry can be locked to upper and
lower reference level in elevation views.
Category: Columns
Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls.
Detail Component line based 2D family, contains a reference line and left and right reference
planes. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value.
Includes the filled region tool.
Detail Component 2D family, is used to create 2D detail components, includes the filled
region tool.
Door - Curtain Wall Family template for door elements of curtain walls.
Category: Doors
Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Contains a
sample ceiling geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed
on any ceiling in a project.
Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Contains
sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on
wall faces in a project.
Category: Entourage
Category: Furniture
Generic Model ceiling based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains a
sample ceiling geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed
on ceiling in a project.
Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Face based
families can only be placed on any face in a project.
Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains
sample floor geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on
a floor face in a project.
Generic Model line based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains a
reference line and left and right reference planes. Geometry can use
length parameter as “stretch” value. Includes the filled region tool.
Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains
sample roof geometry. Roof based families can only be placed on
any roof face in a project.
Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains
sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on
wall faces in a project.
Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample floor
geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in
a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering
tools.
Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample roof
geometry. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in
a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering
tools.
Lighting Fixture ceiling based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample ceiling
geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face
in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering
tools.
Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample wall
geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in
a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering
tools.
Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination
properties for the rendering tools.
Linear Lighting Fixture floor based; Linear Lighting Fixture roof based; Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. The family has
Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based; Linear Lighting Fixture wall illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains the same
based; Linear Lighting Fixture defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures
Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Contains
sample ceiling geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed
on ceiling faces in a project.
Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Contains
sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on
wall faces in a project.
Category: Parking
Category: Planting
Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Contains sample
wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces
in a project.
Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals.
Profile usage can be explicitly assigned.
RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product
family. The family has an rpc file link included.
Category: Entourage
Category: Site
Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. Contains
sample wall geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on
wall faces in a project.
Spot Lighting Fixture floor based; Spot Lighting Fixture roof based; Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures. The family has
Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based; Spot Lighting Fixture wall based; illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. Contains
Spot Lighting Fixture the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Category: Lighting Fixtures
Structural Column Family template to create structural columns. Geometry can be locked
to upper and lower reference level in elevation views.
If a structural column intersects a wall, the column cuts out the wall.
Beams can be placed on structural columns.
Structural Framing - Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families, such as beams
and braces. The family templates contain specific reference planes
for members and stick symbols.
Structural Framing - Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families, such as trusses.
Window - Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls.
Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side.
Category: Windows
Category: Windows
Callout Head Family template for the tag of a callout. Category: Callouts
Door Tag Family template for door tags. Category: Door Tags
Generic Annotation Family template for generic annotations. The category can be set
under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category:
Generic Annotation
Generic Tag Family template for tags. The category can be set under Settings
menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Generic Model
Tags
Grid Head Family template for the grid heads. Category: Grid Heads
Level Head Family template for level heads. Category: Level Heads
Multi-Category Tag Family template for Multi-Category tags. On the Drafting tab of the
Design Bar, click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. A Multi-
Category tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. the same
shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and
can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the Multi-
Category tag. Category: Multi-Category Tags
Room Tag Family template for room tags. Category: Room Tags
Section Head Family template for section heads. In the family the intersection of
the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location
with the system section line. Category: Section Marks
Spot Elevation Symbol Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. Category:
Spot Elevation Symbols
View Title Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet. Category:
View Titles
Window Tag Family template for window tags. Category: Window Tags
Imperial Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes. In a
project, the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View
■ A - 11 x 8.5.rft menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. In the Select a Titleblock dialog, all loaded
title block families are listed for selection.
■ B - 17 x 11.rft
■ C - 24 x 18.rft
■ D - 36 x 24.rft
■ E1 - 42 x 30.rft
Metric
■ A0 metric.rft
■ A1 metric.rft
■ A2 metric.rft
■ A3 metric.rft
■ A4 metric.rft
During this tutorial, you learn the process and methodology of creating a new
techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other
The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood
floor truss. In this case, the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and
grade of the truss chords. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance
to accommodate HVAC systems. The truss also has multiple types, formula-based
component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor.
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric
component creation, not specifically how to make a floor truss. At the end of this
tutorial, you will understand the process, methodology, and the specific techniques
671
Planning a Parametric Component Family
Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process; planning ahead is one of
the most important steps. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the
specific design process. In this lesson, you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select
the family template that is suited to those needs.
2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family?
The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. In this case, the beam design
must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require.
NOTE When creating a new family, you should avoid over-designing the component. If the design requirements
can be met with a simple design, then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. For
every complexity added to a family, there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project.
Take this into consideration during your design planning.
You have completed the planning stage for the new family. Depending on the family you are designing,
the planning stage and questions may differ.
4 Continue with the next exercise, “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673.
3 In the left pane of the New dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates.
4 Scroll through the various template options.
Notice that most of the template names include the component type. In addition, the template name often
includes information how the component would be used with a project, for example: wall based or floor
based.
NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. Select it so that the preview displays.
Like most generic family templates, it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and
Center (front/back).
7 Select Metric Structural Framing - Complex and Trusses.rft, and notice the preview.
Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template, it is not the best starting point for
the beam family.
8 Select Metric Structural Framing - Beams and Braces.rft and notice the preview.
Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. These
planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping
and display requirements of beam components. This template is the best starting point for the new family.
This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Like many templates, the geometry
supplied can be used or discarded as needed.
13 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676.
NOTE When creating or modifying a family, it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align
and lock the solid geometry to it. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works; however, using reference planes and
lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise.
NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. Reference
planes that display within a family file do not display within a project.
Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Before adding new reference
planes, it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.
8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).
You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference
plane: Center (Front/Back).
12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level.
TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. To do this, select the lower horizontal reference
plane, click on the Edit toolbar, and select the Level: Ref. Level as the mirror axis.
These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. This beam requires additional
reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.
15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. When a copy of the reference plane displays below
it, click to place it.
TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend
to pick.
17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left, and when a copy of the reference plane displays to
the right of it, click to place it as shown.
18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right, and when a copy of the reference plane displays to
the left of it, click to place it as shown.
You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. Before you move on to
the next exercise, you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase.
21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right), and when a copy of the reference plane displays
to the right of it, click to place it as shown.
You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. In the following exercise,
you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton.
NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. Make sure you remember where you saved it.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682.
3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. After adding
the dimension, separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown.
TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure.
NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. Level. You may need to use the TAB key
to toggle the selection to the reference plane.
11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane
and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously.
12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model, place the
dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.
13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference
plane, and place it below the dimension you added previously.
■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained, consider making it a type parameter.
■ If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible, consider making it an instance parameter.
■ If the component has material that varies per component, consider making the material parameter an instance
parameter.
■ If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature, consider making it a type parameter.
You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
■ Click OK.
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal
truss chord as shown.
TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal
truss chord.
16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.
17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side
of the center chase as shown.
19 Click Cancel.
20 On the File menu, click Save.
21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.
When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or
manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the
most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.
■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing
area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner.
or
■ Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family
Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.
Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog.
2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply.
Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint
spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference
planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified
value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence
of flexing.
Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or
modify the existing design in any way.
9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.
NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning
because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.
4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your
screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open.
On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply.
Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension
references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference
planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length.
8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.
In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project.
This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes
as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to
test how it works within a project environment.
TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards,
flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected.
14 Click OK.
TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore,
try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.
■ Click Apply.
Dataset
Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes.
19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown.
You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.
21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the
upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints.
26 Zoom to Fit.
31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view.
32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label.
33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and
click OK.
NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss.
Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends,
they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test.
67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.
70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side.
TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the
constraints to the reference planes.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.
NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created
in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new
family in order to ensure consistency.
Datasets
3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1
family has been loaded.
4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.
This project consists of foundation walls, a slab, a wood sill, and a wood rim joist. The rim joist was added
as a beam; therefore, the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another.
TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Structural.
Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected.
NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line, not the wall or rim joist. You do not need to be precise; you are merely
testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes.
■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length.
■ The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered.
In the next lesson, you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes
in length.
IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. The project and family need to interact based on a
consistent file name.
17 Proceed to the next lesson, “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web.rfa.
IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the
truss.
Notice the model lines that surround the web component; they are visible only when you place the cursor
over the component. In the following steps, you align the web panel using these lines rather than the
extrusion edges.
Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. This will be accomplished in the next
exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter.
13 For the align-to point, select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase
extrusion.
15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the
center chase as shown.
Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this
lesson.
NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members
will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. In addition, it is
important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints.
20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point.
21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown.
22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component.
23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.
■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component.
■ Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the
outside edge of the center chase.
■ Place the dimension as shown.
■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component.
■ Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the
outside edge of the center chase.
■ Place the dimension as shown.
In the next exercise, you label these dimensions. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to
maintain the web position as the truss changes depth, length, or the width of the center chase.
4 In the Family Types dialog, under Constraints, enter Depth - (Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth
Formula.
TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field.
This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth.
NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. When you refer to another parameter within a formula, ensure you enter it
exactly as it is named.
5 Click OK.
9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebDepth, and click OK.
In the Type Properties dialog, notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button.
Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. In addition, notice the center
of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it.
16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula.
After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.
27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web.
28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model
to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially
important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog.
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the
corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner,
use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the
corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components
to each other.
20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.
21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.
22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the
same techniques as you did in the previous three steps.
NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each
other when you change the depth of the truss.
Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to
lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The
primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length.
Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing
the parameter value.
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing.
46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss.
9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.
4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.
When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are
assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood
material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control
over component visibility within a project.
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials
dialog.
16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate.
17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK.
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and
click to select it.
29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family.
30 Click Yes to open the family for editing.
The web component family opens in a 3D view.
52 Click OK.
53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss -
Webs, and click OK.
Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.
8 Click OK.
Datasets
26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium.
Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed.
NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects.
11 Click OK.
5 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter the follow formula for Depth:
if(Length < 6600, 286, if(Length < 7500, 350, if(Length < 9000, 400, 400)))
6 Click Apply.
7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 8000 for length, and click Apply.
Notice the truss depth increases.
8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for length, click Apply, and click OK.
NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change.
IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint, you probably noticed a change in the
amount of time the view needed to regenerate. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by
over-designed families.
741
742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features
Curtain Systems
18
Curtain systems are not walls, and they are not windows. Like walls, they can
define space and separate the exterior from the interior. They are typically not
load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like windows, they can usually
include mullions and have glazed panels. Unlike windows, curtain systems are
A typical curtain system comprises a wall, panel, grid lines, and mullions, and
you can change these elements individually. This affects the entire curtain system.
For example, to resize the system, you need to change the length of the wall. To
switch panel types, you need to select a panel. To change grids, you select the
grid.
You can add curtain systems with the wall command, or you can use a specific
743
Flat Curtain System
In this lesson, you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of
the model.
Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you create a curtain system using the wall command. This type of curtain system is also referred to as
a curtain wall.
Dataset
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Ground Floor.
2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor.
7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views, and double-click Southeast Isometric.
9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.
10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.
The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.
13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel; you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels,
using curtain grids.
24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line.
25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
26 While pressing CTRL, select the 3 grid lines you just placed.
32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint
of the larger vertical panel. Click to place another grid line.
TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel, watch the tooltips and the Status Bar.
36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line, and then select the segment above it.
The segment line style changes to dashed.
TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions.
45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.
46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar.
You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.
47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. The line style changes from dashed to solid to
indicate a grid segment has been added. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels.
Use the following image as a guide.
TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. To get the horizontal grid
to display between the vertical grids, click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.
48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid), click in any white space to exit the editor.
Next, you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors.
53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door.
54 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
55 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings
of the curtain wall doors.
Now, on the new curtain system you added, you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones.
57 On the View Control Bar, click , and click Wireframe. This changes the graphics style of the view.
Next, you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid.
Changing panels
63 Click OK twice.
64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels.
65 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.
The glazed panels display in blue, and the solid panels display in white.
68 On the File menu, click Save As. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.rvt.
Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them; however, there are a few that you do not want, so
you remove them next. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary, because their width reduces
the size of the doors.
Removing mullions
Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. You are going to change some mullion joins.
10 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.
11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.
The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above.
TIP After selecting the vertical mullion, you can also right-click, and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to
break the mullion at both joins.
5 Click .
6 In the Element Properties dialog:
13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Divide the halves into quarters, eighths,
and then sixteenths.
14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click East.
15 Zoom in to the cylinder, and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids.
Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.
17 Using a selection box, select the bottom layer of panels. Remember to click to filter out all other
elements from the selection except Curtain Panels.
18 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Generic - 300mm.
This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.
24 On the View toolbar, click (Default 3D View), and then click (Dynamically Modify View).
25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.
The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building.
For vertical mullions, you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.
■ Click (Polygon).
If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar, click , and select it.
10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point.
Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same
location.
28 Click , and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.
29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion.
30 Click .
31 In the Element Properties dialog, select Circular Mullion for Family.
You have placed more mullions than you want, so you remove the unwanted ones.
This completes the exercise for adding mullions, as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. In this lesson,
you learned to create a curved curtain system, make custom curtain panels and mullions, and then apply those custom
elements to the system.
Sloped Glazings
Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems.
Dataset
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
4 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope.
6 Select the inside faces of the base walls.
TIP To chain select all the walls, place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls, and press TAB. All the
inside faces highlight, and you can click to select them all.
Storefront System
In this exercise, you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system.
Dataset
7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.
8 Click the temporary dimension, enter 10200 mm, and press ENTER.
This specifies an exact length for the wall.
The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout, which is specified in the type. To see how the grid
layout is defined, you can look at the properties of the storefront wall.
14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters, click OK to
close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance
parameters.
15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall, for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 45 and for
Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle, enter 15.
16 Click OK.
This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. In this exercise, you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set
up a grid layout.
11 Click OK.
Next, you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.
NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system, but now that you have created a ruled
curtain system, you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want.
14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves, quarters, and
then eighths.
Finally, you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels.
15 Highlight a top level glazed panel, right-click, and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2.
16 In the Type Selector, select System Panel : Solid.
17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.
This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system, and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems.
In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system, embed a curtain system inside another wall, and define a
ruled curtain system.
2008. In addition, you learn how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs
773
Creating Roofs
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, and mansard roofs. In this
lesson, you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.
You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can
sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work
plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.
Dataset
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.
3 In the Work Plane dialog, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Go To View dialog, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to select a
section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.
6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK.
Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help determine
key points on the profile sketch.
TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially, you can place it in the general
location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from
the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured
from (face, centerline, and so on), click the blue square on the witness line.
9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.
10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.
Next, use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior
walls.
Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of
the house that joins the breezeway.
21 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections (Type 1), and double-click Section 1.
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
23 Select one of the breezeway walls, press CTRL, and select the second wall.
24 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.
25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.
26 On the View toolbar, click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope lines to
define the roof gable ends.
1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
3 On the Options Bar, verify that Defines slope is selected, and enter 600 for Overhang.
4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line
displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.
5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line
displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.
Next, edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.
9 Press CTRL, select both slope definition lines, and on the Options Bar, click .
The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default, the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm
run.
13 On the View toolbar, click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. After you define the roof
slope lines and complete the footprint, you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. When you
complete the roof, the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, clear Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.
Next, add new slope lines to the roof.
18 On the View toolbar, click to view the new roof in the model.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Verify that a dashed
green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.
Next, close the roof sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The
sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these
lines to create a valid sketch.
12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.
14 Under Constraints, enter 600 for Base Offset From Level, and click OK.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.
22 Using the same method that you used previously, join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold
CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.
Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next, use the Join Roof
command to fix the roof.
25 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
4 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and enter 300 for Overhang.
5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way, press TAB, and then click to select
all three of the entry way walls.
Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the
walls.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these
lines to create a valid sketch.
12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the
roof.
13 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope.
Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.
14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope, and press ENTER.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click 3D.
2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch.
4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region, and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.
Before you can add slope arrows, you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. To help
locate the position of each split, you need to add two reference planes.
Next, change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope.
11 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.
12 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope.
Next, add two new slope arrows.
■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of
the slope arrow tail.
■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays, and then select it to specify the location
of the slope arrow head.
NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof, use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Garage Roof.
2 Select the gable roof over the garage.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit.
4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. When aligning eaves, you must select one eave to use
to align both eaves.
Next, select a method to align the eaves.
10 On the Options Bar, select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the
eave height of the first eave.
11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.
Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click North.
Notice the model has four defined levels:
In the next steps, you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.
9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
17 On the View toolbar, click to display the model with the complete mansard roof.
18 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Dataset
4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.
12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.
Creating Gutters
In this exercise, you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium
building model.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.
7 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value field for Material, and then click .
8 In the Materials dialog, select Metal-Aluminum for Name, and click OK three times.
9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.
Creating Soffits
In this exercise, you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium
building model that you used in the previous exercise.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Roof.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.
3 On the Design Bar, click Pick Roofs.
4 Select the roof.
9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
relationships. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Two
schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. You can edit the
rentable scheme and create additional schemes. You then create area plans for
each scheme as needed. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Finally,
you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans.
797
Using Area Analysis Tools
In this lesson, you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable
area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. In the final exercise, you create a color fill plan and area
schedule based on the area schemes and plans.
5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 is the active view.
6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Settings.
TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Room and Area.
7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog, click the Area Schemes tab.
There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. These schemes define spatial
relationships.
8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog, click the Room Calculations tab.
You can specify the height where the room area is calculated.
NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line, the system-computed height defaults to the level,
or 0.
■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.
You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations, as well as selecting whether
to have room volumes calculated automatically.
9 Click Cancel.
10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Area Plan.
11 In the New Area Plan dialog, do the following:
NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views, you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent
changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan.
12 When the informational dialog displays, click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically.
When you select Yes in this dialog, area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of
the building model, forming a closed loop. If you select No, you must manually add these boundary lines.
13 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building).
Expand Area Plans (Gross Building), and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.
NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing
areas. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. To modify the area, you must select one of the
reference lines, rather than the area tag. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print.
15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag.
NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. A room tag measures the area enclosed
within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings.
Next, you create a new area plan for rentable space. You add and use area boundary lines to define the
office areas, common areas, and store area.
16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Area Plan.
17 In the New Area Plan dialog, do the following:
NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Although the rule for these lines
is to follow the inside face of the wall, if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height, the area
boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass.
Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Expand Area Plans (Rentable), and notice
that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.
19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model.
NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area, place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays
in the status bar, and click to select the area.
34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps, add an area in the common space to the right of the double
doors hosted by the west exterior wall.
In the Element Properties dialog, do the following:
35 Add an area to the building model core, enter Core for Name, and select Major Vertical Penetration for
Area Type.
36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Name the areas Tenant 3
and Tenant 4, and select Store Area for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right, and Tenant 4 in
the lower right.
NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise.
In this exercise, you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a
rentable area. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.
In the next exercise, you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.
9 Click OK.
The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the
schedule.
design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You can
create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model
shell. At any time, you can pick massing faces and make building model elements
such as walls, floors, curtain systems, and roofs. After you make building elements,
you can specify the view to display massing elements, building elements, or both.
Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. If you
modify a massing face, you then need to update the building face.
In this tutorial, you create a new building model using the various massing tools
to add and cut mass. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building
model, you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You then
modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see
807
Using Massing Tools
In this lesson, you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. You assign the
default wall, floor, and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise,
the building model uses those element types to define the walls, roofs, and floors.
Dataset
TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click anywhere over the Design Bar, and click
Massing.
TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
15 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.
16 On the Sketch Design Bar, click Lines, and click on the Options Bar.
17 On the Options Bar, enter 1550 mm for the Offset.
This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor.
18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted.
Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form :
Extrusion : Shape Handle.
26 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click West.
27 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend.
28 In the Work Plane dialog, select Pick a plane, and click OK.
29 In the drawing area, highlight the larger form.
34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown, and click to select the line start point.
The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint.
TIP If you do not see this option, click the arrow next to the drawing options, and click Arc passing through
three points from the menu.
37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.
42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown.
45 On the Design Bar, click Lines and, on the Options Bar, click .
46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown.
53 Proceed to the next exercise, Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model.
In this exercise, you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model.
In the next exercise, you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.
Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813
Dataset
■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Massing_Start.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 In the drawing area, select the mass.
When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow, you specify the intersection of the reference
planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. These reference planes act primarily as
sketching aids.
9 On the Design Bar, click Lines and, on the Options Bar, click and select Chain.
NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode, click on the View Control Bar, and then click Hidden Line.
10 Enter SI for intersection snap, and sketch the first void extrusion as shown.
11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. When sketching each extrusion, snap the corners to the
intersections.
In this exercise, you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise.
Dataset
In this exercise, you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file.
Dataset
1 If not already selected, click on the View toolbar to show the massing model.
TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families.
Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. In the next exercise, you join
these mass elements.
In this exercise, you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. You also loaded
other existing mass families and added them to the building model.
Dataset
Join geometry
NOTE When you join geometry, the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected
mass element.
3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown.
4 Select the triangle, and then press ESC to see the result.
5 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge
of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.
7 With the smaller box still selected, click on the Edit toolbar.
TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally.
Join geometry
In this exercise, you joined mass elements together. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently
selected mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another
element.
Dataset
1 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the triangle mass element.
2 On the Window menu, click Toolbar ➤ Design Options.
(If Design Options is already selected, do not clear the check mark.)
TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely.
14 In the drawing area, select the 2 semi barrel vaults, and click .
15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property, and click OK twice.
TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes.
21 In the drawing area, select the three arc domes, and click .
22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property, and click OK twice.
23 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Elevations, double-click North.
TIP To find the correct shapes, move the cursor over shapes in the drawing, and watch the status bar. It will
indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. While pressing CTRL, click to select each of the arc
domes and semi barrel values.
In this exercise, you placed mass elements into Design Options. You then switched between different design options
to get different versions of the design.
Dataset
Creating walls
6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line.
7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.
8 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 3.
9 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
10 Select all the faces shown in red.
11 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 5.
12 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
15 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
16 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront.
17 Select the 3 faces shown in red.
19 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 9.
In this exercise, you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls.
Creating floors
In this exercise, you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. You
then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model.
Creating roofs
NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element
family, click Create Roof. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof.
7 With the Roof by Face command still selected, select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector.
8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.
9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.
10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element.
11 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
12 Click the Model Categories tab, select Curtain Panels, Curtain Systems, and Walls, and then click OK.
8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected, select the blended form on the in-place mass.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
3 On the Model Categories tab, clear Curtain Panels, Curtain Systems, Floors, Roofs, and Walls, and then
click OK.
Next, you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.
13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.
15 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown.
TIP To select the curtain wall, press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls
: Curtain Wall : Storefront. Also, remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here;
you want to select the smaller one.
In this exercise, you changed the size of an existing mass family. You then modified building elements to resize with
the new mass family.
3 In the Project Browser, right-click on the 3D view, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
4 Rename the view 3D - Massing only.
5 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
6 On the Model Categories tab, click All to select all categories.
7 Clear one of the check boxes.
8 Click None to clear the selection.
9 Select Mass, and click OK.
grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the
modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance
of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new
You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model
group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom
Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other
team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different
project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also
gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the
library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and
then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office
can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive
units.
845
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units.
Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units, hotel rooms, and typical
office layouts.
After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods.
You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving
the changes.
In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested
within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When
you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.
6 In the drawing area, select the center control for the group origin, and drag it to the upper-right corner of
the kitchen.
9 In the Project Browser, under Groups, expand Model, right-click Typical Kitchen, and click Create Instance.
10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan, and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen
group.
Modifying a Group
In this exercise, you make changes to an instance of a group. When you finish editing, all instances of the same group
in the drawing are updated.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise, m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.
NOTE To display an excluded element, select the element, and click (Include group member).
4 Move the cursor over the door, press TAB, and click to select the door.
Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, select Opening ➤ Wall Opening.
23 In the drawing area, select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top.
24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall, move the cursor up, and click near the top corner of the wall to
create an opening.
Nesting Groups
In this exercise, you add the Typical Kitchen group, created in an earlier lesson, and the wall and folding doors for the
closet, to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group, which acts
as the host. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit, all instances of the host group are updated to contain
the nested group.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise, m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.
13 Press and hold CTRL, and select the note and the filled region.
6 In the drawing area, draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags.
11 In the Project Browser, expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit, and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door
Tags is attached.
NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential; therefore, the doors are numbered based upon the order
in which you placed each group.
16 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate.rvt.
25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project, and the link is removed.
26 Close the file with or without saving it.
869
Using Site Tools
In this lesson, you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. You start by importing the site
contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. You add property lines manually, convert the data to a table, and
then modify the data. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas, islands, and walkways. After grading the
topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface, you add a building pad to the site. In the final exercises, you
add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule.
Creating a Toposurface
In this exercise, you create a toposurface using two different methods. Using the first method, you create a toposurface
by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. In the second part of this exercise, you import contour data from
a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.
Dataset
TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site.
6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference.
Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. A toposurface must have at
least three elevation points.
7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. The circle should be
approximately 55000 mm wide.
10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm, 12000 mm, 15000 mm, and 18000 mm absolute elevations. Try to
add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. Use the following illustration as a reference.
16 On the View toolbar, click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.
17 Select the toposurface and, on the Standard toolbar, click to delete it.
18 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South.
Before importing the contour data, modify the level names and elevations.
21 Click the Level 2 text, rename the level Basement, and press ENTER.
22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views, click Yes.
23 Click the Level 1 text, rename the level Base Site Elevation, and press ENTER.
Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views.
You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import.
27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog, clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark, and click OK.
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view.
29 Select the imported topography.
Until it is exploded, it is considered an import symbol.
When you select the import symbol, you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation
points.
38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog, clear C_INDX, and click OK.
42 On the View toolbar, click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the change in
this toposurface elevation is minor.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.
7 Move the cursor over the property lines and, when they highlight, select the lines.
8 On the Options Bar, select Edit Table.
A warning dialog is displayed, informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be
undone.
NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your
sketch.
11 Select the property lines and, on the Standard toolbar, click to delete them.
12 On the Design Bar, click Property Line.
13 In the Property Line Creation dialog, select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings, and
click OK.
14 In the Property Lines dialog, click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data.
15 Starting in Row #1, enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4:
■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E
■ 80000 N 90°0'0" W
■ 100000 N 0°0'0" E
■ 80000 N 90°0'0" E
16 Click OK.
The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.
17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference, click to
place the property lines.
NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Drafting.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
32 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880.
In this exercise, you created two sets of property lines. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data.
You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. In the final step,
you loaded and tagged the property line segments.
In the next exercise, you modify site settings and contour line visibility.
6 In the Object Styles dialog, specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory:
7 Click OK.
12 On the File menu, click Close. Click Yes when prompted to save changes.
The next exercise requires a new dataset.
In this exercise, you created a new object style subcategory for topography. You then modified the site setting to
distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory.
In the next exercise, you create topographic subregions to define roads, parking areas, and islands.
TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles, use the trim tool to create
just one closed loop, and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. The horizontal rectangle is
approximately 7500 mm wide; the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.
Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. When you finish the sketch in a
later step, the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.
This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. As you create new subregions,
they display within this schedule.
TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Delete overlapping lines, and use the split and trim tools to
clean up the sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Subregion.
22 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
23 In the upper-right parking area, use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking
island shown in the following illustration. Precise dimensions are not important at this time.
NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project, there is still only one toposurface.
If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion, you must either edit the entire toposurface
or split the toposurface.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
RELATED For more information regarding phasing, see the tutorial, “Using Phasing” on page 992.
9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box
allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around
the parking area.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.
13 Press DELETE.
20 On the View toolbar, click , and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
NOTE By default, the Pick Walls command is active. If you have an existing building model, you can pick the
exterior walls to define the building pad.
7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
9 On the View toolbar, click , and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new
building pad.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the parking space.
6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking
area.
NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.
TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.
9 On the View toolbar, click , and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new
parking spaces.
13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.
NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration, the landscape shown
in the previous illustration has been rendered.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
17 Proceed to the next exercise, “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
10 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
11 On the Window menu, click Tile.
This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule.
12 In the Site plan, zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces.
13 In the Parking Schedule, under Space, number the first three spaces consecutively.
Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Also notice that when you place the
cursor in the parking schedule, the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know
which space you are numbering.
14 In the Parking Schedule, under Space, finish numbering the remaining spaces.
a building model skeleton. You begin by adding the structural walls, columns,
and beams to Level 1. After completing level 1, you copy the entire structure and
use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. In
the final lesson, you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the
building model.
903
Adding Structural Walls
In this lesson, you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. You use an imported
DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. You then sketch additional walls to which
you add dimensions and constraints.
Dataset
In this exercise, you imported a DWG file. This file is used in the next exercise, “Sketching Structural Walls” on page
905, to trace the initial set of structural walls.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
■ Select Depth.
■ Click .
■ Select Chain.
■ Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line.
In the steps that follow, you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration.
7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain.
8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line, and click to specify the wall endpoint.
10 Move the curser to the right, and click the next line intersection.
11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a
parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left, and click to complete the chain of walls.
14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
15 Zoom around the second chain of lines.
17 Using the bulleted steps below, sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration.
■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins
grid C.
■ Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction.
■ When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain, zoom in to ensure you select
the intersection of the imported lines and grid C.
■ Clear Chain.
■ Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line.
■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. This is the left extent of the arc.
■ Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. This is the right extent of the arc.
■ Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees.
30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right.
34 Select the horizontal wall, click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C, enter 1500, and
press ENTER.
36 On the Design Bar, click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar, clear Chain.
In the steps that follow, you create the final structural walls for the project. Both walls are 1200 mm long.
37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below.
In this exercise, you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. After turning off the visibility of the
linked DWG, you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model.
In the next exercise, “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913, you add dimensions and equality constraints
to the walls. You then make minor modifications to their position.
■ Select .
■ Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer.
■ Select Entire Walls for Pick.
After you select Entire Walls, the Options button becomes available.
■ On the Options Bar, click Options to specify the wall pick options.
■ In the Auto Dimension Options dialog, select Intersecting Walls, and click OK.
5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall, and when it highlights, select it.
6 Move the cursor to the left, and click to place the dimension as shown.
In this exercise, you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls
equidistant. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design.
In the next lesson, “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916, you add structural columns and different
beam types to the building model.
TIP When adding the column, if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below, press the
SPACEBAR to rotate the column.
Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A.
13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position.
18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below, press the SPACEBAR to rotate them.
Columns B3-5 are shown below.
TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR, the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. Although
you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns, you could not have rotated them independently
of each other. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns
B1-5.
In this exercise, you used various methods to add structural columns, and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR.
In the next exercise, “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921, you add structural beams to the building
model.
TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first, and then move the cursor up to grid A.
Other Other
20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4, click the temporary dimension value, enter 8200, and
press ENTER.
26 On the Options Bar, select Chain, and for Usage, select Girder.
27 Using point-to-point insertion, refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5.
NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4, make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. You may
need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. You can also use the shortcut key, SI, to snap only to intersections.
The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. If the
W310x32.7 beam had crossed grid A, it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed
first, and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams.
45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below.
54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3.
55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall, and click when it intersects grid 2.
In this exercise, you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. You used the grid tool to add
beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed
beams.
In the next exercise, “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932, you add joists and purlins to the building model.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
11 Click OK.
■ Click .
■ Clear Group and Associate.
■ Enter 14 for Number.
■ Select 2nd for Move to.
14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point.
15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. Once the direction
is set, enter 1250 and press ENTER.
NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight, style, and color within the Object Styles dialog.
■ Click .
■ Clear Group and Associate.
■ Enter 7 for Number.
■ Select 2nd for Move to.
22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point.
23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right, and click.
24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2, and create a crossing selection that includes all the
structural framing members in this portion of the view.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and notice the connection symbols display.
30 On the View toolbar, click , and adjust the view until it resembles the image below.
In this exercise, you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage
parameter value depending on the join conditions.
In the next lesson, “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938, you create new levels and copy the level
one structure to the upper levels of the building model.
■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2.
■ Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2.
■ Click to add Level 3.
In this exercise, you created three new levels. These levels that are required in the next exercise, “Duplicating the
Existing Design” on page 940, where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
In this exercise, you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create
the structural framing on the upper levels.
In the next lesson, “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942, you create a framing elevation in order to add
structural braces.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
You can now view the new elevation, Elevation 1-a, in the Project Browser.
Notice the stick framing representation. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set
to coarse. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view.
You are ready to add the structural braces.
In this exercise, you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces.
In the next exercise, “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943, you add c-channel bracing to the building model.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4.
7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4.
■ Click .
■ Clear Group and Associate.
■ Enter 4 for Number.
■ Select 2nd for Move to.
■ Select Constrain.
12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point.
13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint.
The braces are arrayed to Level 1.
14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged.
In this exercise, you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array.
same time, called Worksharing. In this tutorial, you learn how to use Worksharing
to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have
You can enable Worksharing for any project. A workset is a collection of building
elements, such as walls, doors, floors, stairs, and so on. Only one user can edit
each workset at a given time. All other team members can view this workset;
however, they cannot make changes to it. This prevents possible conflicts within
the project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that
someone else is actively working on, you can borrow that element without
can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and
publish work to a central file whenever they choose. They can update their local
files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published.
949
Overview
Sharing a project for the first time
To share a project, you must first enable Worksharing. The first time you activate worksets within a project, a dialog
displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. After the project is shared, each building element in
the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element
within the property dialog for that element.
In a shared project, you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. To make a workset editable,
go to the Worksets dialog, select the desired workset, and click Editable. Each workset can only be editable by one user
at a time. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out, use Element
Borrowing.
When you are working on a shared project, you specify an active workset. Any new model elements are automatically
assigned to the active workset. Elements specific to a view, such as annotations and dimensions, are automatically
assigned to the view workset of the current view.
When opening a Worksharing-enabled project, you can select which worksets are open or closed. Elements in closed
worksets are not read from disk until they are required. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount
of memory it uses. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. You can improve the
display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work.
In the lessons and exercises that follow, you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You gain
valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project.
The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project
team. When setting up Worksharing, you should take several considerations into account:
General Considerations:
■ Project size
■ Team size
■ Team member roles
■ Default workset visibility
You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature
correctly. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will
maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project.
Project size
Team size
You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. You should
have at least one workset for each person, not including the Project Standards, Shared Levels and Grids, and View
worksets. In most projects, greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members.
Experience has shown that, for a typical project, the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each
team member.
TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use, make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately.
One user starts to work on the project. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible
and it should include many of the families required by the project. The building model should also reach a reasonable
point of development before you enable Worksharing.
After the building model is ready for multiple user access, the project coordinator should enable Worksharing.
After enabling Worksharing, the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. When
creating the new worksets, remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility.
After you have created the initial worksets, you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. For
example, if a workset named Interior was created, you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior
components to that workset.
The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled, the file is saved as the central file. The central
file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Therefore, it
is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Generally, the central file is not
a file that a team member would open and work in directly.
Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion
of the building model. When finished or at regular intervals, each user saves their changes back to the central file where
the changes can be propagated to all team members. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save
As” to create a local copy of the central file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that
created them.
Whenever you open a central or local file, you have the option to choose which worksets to open. This is called “Selective
Open.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project, you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting
to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks.
When you “check out” a workset, you make that workset editable by you. This gives you the right to make changes to
the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable
at one time. However, no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them
back into the central file.
Work on the project, within the local file, proceeds as usual. As you work, new building elements are assigned to the
workset that is active at the moment. On the Options Bar, you can select which workset is active. You can make a
workset active only if it is editable by you.
As you work on the project throughout the day, you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals.
When you save locally (to your local file), your changes are saved; however, they are not propagated to the rest of the
team. When you save to the central file, your changes propagate to the entire team. When you save to the central file,
you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. This makes them available to other team members. Any
changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or
when you select Reload Latest.
At the end of a work session, you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as
editable. After saving to the central file, you should then save to your local file. This ensures that your local file is
synchronized with the central file.
2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. You can work on the
project from a remote location by doing the following:
■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file, make any
required worksets editable, save to the central file, and then save the local file.
■ When working remotely, you work no differently then you would in the office. You can modify any
elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. You can also
add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable.
If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going
remote, you can make the workset Editable at Risk. In this situation, you will not be able to save your
changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those
changes back to the central file. In this instance, if you know who checked out the required workset, you
may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. If you choose
Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file,
you will not only lose the changes to that workset, you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets.
If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset, you can save
your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work.
Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost, you should use it only
when:
■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file, or
■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. If you have
a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file, you may want to request that someone
start a session of Revit Architecture, change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options,
and make that workset editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the
remainder of your absence.
WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible.
3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file; for
instance, using VPN. Alternatively, a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can
then publish the changes back to the central file, reload the latest changes from the central file, and transfer
the updated local file back to the remote user.
Remote rendering
4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported, it is not recommended unless you understand
the implications for the rest of the team. If you intend to render the building model while away from the
office, you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. To do this, you should
check out the Materials workset. This means that other team members will not be able to change any
materials while you have the Materials workset checked out.
In this conceptual exercise, you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. You learned the basic steps of
project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.
In the next exercise, you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets.
TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. You cannot change your
username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Do not change your username during this exercise
unless explicitly instructed to do so.
■ Families
■ Project Standards
■ Views
5 Scroll down the list of workset names, and notice all are editable by you.
When you enable worksharing, Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and
settings into the new worksets:
9 Click OK.
The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Because furniture should only be visible in specific
views, you should turn off Visible by default in all views. This improves performance since fewer components
need to be generated in each view.
10 Click New.
11 Enter Furniture Layout, clear Visible by default in all views, and click OK.
The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Rather than create a new workset for
these elements, you can rename the default workset, currently named Workset1.
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
17 In the drawing area, select any of the exterior walls of the building model.
TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. Hold Shift down to deselect an element.
29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.
30 Click OK.
The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. If any interior elements remain,
select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout.
44 Click OK.
45 On the File menu, click Close.
If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial, make sure you remember the location
of this central file. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises.
In this exercise, you enabled Worksharing on a project, created new worksets to accommodate each team member, and
then assigned building model elements to the worksets. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets.
This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets.
10 In the Worksets dialog, select Interior Layout for Name, and select Yes for Editable.
Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset.
11 Click OK.
You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Before working on the model, you
should activate the Worksets toolbar.
14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
On the Options Bar, notice the Editable Only option. If this is selected, you can only select editable elements
within the drawing area. Verify that it is cleared.
16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset
that is not currently editable.
19 Under Constraints, select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line, and click OK.
Because this element is not owned by another user, Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your
changes. If it was owned by another user, a message would display and you would have the option to cancel
the change or make the element editable.
The upper exterior wall should still be selected.
21 Click OK.
22 On the File menu, click Worksets.
In the Worksets dialog, notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset, but you are listed as a
borrower of that workset. In this case, you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall.
23 Click OK.
All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. If you
place the cursor over any of the new elements, a tooltip, which matches the information in the Status Bar,
displays the workset as well as the element type.
When working in your local file, you should perform regular saves. It is recommended that you locally
save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours.
■ Borrowed Elements
■ User-created Worksets
37 Click OK.
If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise, leave this
file open in its current state.
In this exercise, you created your local file, checked out worksets, and borrowed an element from a workset you did
not own. You modified the building model, and published your changes back to the central file where other team
members can see them.
NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2), skip the following section, and proceed to Creating a local copy.
WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file, return to the Settings dialog, and reset the
Username to your computer login name. This is a system setting.
5 In this exercise, two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in
a previous exercise. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files
on the network, select one of those central files to be used in this exercise.
Regardless of which central file you choose to use, one user has already created a local file. For training
purposes, consider that person to be User 1. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen
central file is User 2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. Throughout the remainder of this
exercise, instructions are staggered, specifically sequenced, and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2.
6 On the File menu, click Open, and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets
Project-Central.rvt.
7 In the Open dialog, select the central file and, under Open Worksets, select Specify.
8 Click Open.
Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Only the worksets you select
and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition, any referenced workset is opened but
hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance
while you work.
9 In the Opening Worksets dialog, select all the User-Created worksets, and click OK.
16 Click OK.
User 1: Check out worksets, modify the building model, and publish changes
17 User 1 should still have the local file open. If it is not open, open it now.
18 On the File menu, click Worksets.
Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2.
22 Click OK.
23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration, and move it to the left until it approaches
the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall.
29 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. That is
because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated.
A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. This is because windows
are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.
35 Using the following illustration as a guide, delete the left window on the lower exterior wall, and move
the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict.
42 On the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Duplicate.
43 On the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Level 1, and click Rename.
44 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 1 Furniture Plan, and click OK.
45 On the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.
46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
NOTE System families, such as Wall Types, are placed under Project Standards, rather than Families.
64 Click OK.
65 On the File menu, click Save to Central.
66 In the Save to Central dialog, select:
■ Borrowed Elements
■ User-created Worksets
■ Save the local file after “Save to Central”
67 Click OK.
If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise,
leave this file open in its current state.
■ User-created Worksets
■ Save the local file after “Save to Central”
In this exercise, two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Each user checked out worksets, modified
the building model, and published their changes back to the central file.
In the final exercise of this tutorial, you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively
working on.
If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial, “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users”
on page 965, leave this file open in its current state. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first
sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section, Checking out worksets.
NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2), finished the previous workset exercises, and still have your local files
open, proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets.
If you have not completed the previous workset exercises, you need to set up your central and local files. Only one user
needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location.
NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial, you may receive a message informing you that the central file
has been relocated. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. These messages are a result of the central file being
relocated (to your PC). In subsequent steps, you save the dataset as a central file, and these problems are rectified.
Dataset
6 For the sake of simplicity, the user that saved the central file should be User 1. The central file should still
be open.
12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience, perform the following steps to
create a session for User 2:
■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting
it from the Start menu.
■ On the Settings menu, click Options.
■ Click the General tab of the Options dialog.
■ Set the Username to User 2, and click OK.
WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file, return to the Settings dialog, and reset the
Username to your computer login name. This is a system setting.
13 On the File menu, click Open, and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file.
14 In the Open dialog, select the central file and under Open Worksets, select Specify.
15 Click Open.
Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Only the worksets you select
and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition, any referenced workset is opened but
hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance
while you work.
21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. Afterwards, the steps for each user
have to be followed in sequence.
25 Under Active Workset, select Exterior Shell, and then click OK.
28 Under Active Workset, select Interior Layout, and then click OK.
31 On the left exterior wall, select the second window from the top.
A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.
32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You can do this by dragging the window or by
modifying one of the temporary dimension values.
A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1.
33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window.
After you submit the request, a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1.
At this point, you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element.
Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission.
34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization, click
the File menu, and click Editing Requests.
36 Click Grant.
37 Click Close.
■ User-created Worksets
■ Borrowed Elements (User 2 only)
■ Save the local file after “Save to Central”
In this multi-user exercise, you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was
actively being edited by another user. In this case, you requested permission to edit the element, and the other user
granted it.
detailed engineering designs. Using design options, you create multiple design
schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the
project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically
assigned to a design option), you can study and modify each design option and
In this tutorial, you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and
969
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project
You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. At any time in the design
process, you can have multiple sets of design options, and each option set can have multiple schemes. For example,
you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In addition, you can have an
option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. After you and the client agree
on the final design, you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set.
In this particular case, the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. The client is
interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. The client
has asked you to create various options.
In the first exercise in this lesson, you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural
design option set. In the second exercise, you create two roof system design options that work with the structural
options. In the final exercise of this lesson, you learn how to manage and organize the design options, make your final
design decision, and delete the unwanted options from the project. These three exercises are designed to be completed
sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.
TIP In this exercise, the roof and structure systems must work together; therefore, each is constructed for
interchangeability.
4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click ROOF TERRACE.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region, and zoom in on the upper half of the building model.
6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Column.
7 In the Type Selector, select Round Column: 75mm Diameter.
8 Using the following illustration as a guide, add three columns. Arrows and the dimension lines have been
added for training purposes only. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and
the wall, the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls, and the third
column centered between the two.
TIP To center the middle column, either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it, or add a
dimension string between the columns, and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. You should delete
the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column.
■ Constrain
■ Copy
■ Multiple
The Copy command is a two-click process. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to
be copied, and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to.
In this case, the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. By
selecting Multiple, you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first
click). Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns.
15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.
16 Zoom in around the notch construction, and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch.
17 Zoom out and, using the same technique, add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this
one. When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process.
Because of the size of the columns, they are difficult to see in this view.
■ Zoom in on the upper-left column, and click at its center to set the beam start point.
■ Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column.
■ Zoom in on the upper right column, and click on the center to set the beam endpoint.
Use the following illustration as a guide. In it, two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the
location of the start and end points of the beam.
■ Constrain
■ Copy
■ Multiple
27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch, and click the center point.
This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.
28 Zoom out, move down to the next set of columns, zoom into the left column, and select the center of the
column to add a copy.
29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.
NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option, not a new option set.
Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them.
49 In this section of the exercise, you create the second design option. When finished, it will resemble the
following illustration.
52 Click Close.
Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display.
59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower
edge of the roof beam. Refer to the following illustration.
60 After aligning the beam, click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.
61 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. The second click represents
the move end point.
64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.
65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Click
to indicate the end point of the move.
69 Click Close.
70 On the File menu, click Save As.
71 Navigate to your preferred directory, name the file, m_Urban_House-in progress.rvt, and click Save.
NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise, you need this file in its current state. You can leave it
open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.
In this exercise, you set up multiple design option sets, each with multiple design options to pick from. After setting
up the design option sets and their subordinate options, you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets,
5 Click Close.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click TOP OF CORE.
7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
8 In the Type Selector, select Rafter 50mm x 250mm.
9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the
beam traversing the span.
10 Referring to the following illustration, place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the
horizontal beam 900 mm.
The dimensions shown are for training purposes. If you need to add dimensions, delete them after the
rafter is in place.
You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart.
17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam; click in the center
of the intersection to specify the array start point.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the louver you just placed.
25 With the louver still selected, click the Edit menu, and click Array.
26 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
27 For the array starting point, click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam.
28 Move the cursor vertically downward, and, when the listening dimension displays, enter 300, and press
Enter.
36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.
37 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name, and click OK.
The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the dataset specifically for this purpose and is hidden
in all views.
38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Click OK.
Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it, you only need to sketch a single line or a string
of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. In this case, you must create a draped canvas sunscreen.
Therefore, the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns.
41 Select the top of the left column, the top of the next column on the right, and then adjust the dip of the
arc until it is 60 degrees. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value
immediately after you create the line.
42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns.
NOTE As you sketch the arcs, try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible, then you can modify
it through the dimension. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. You will fix this
in a later step.
45 Click OK.
The roof sketch must be a continuous line. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect
to the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool.
NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise, you need this file in its current state. You can leave it
open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.
In this exercise, you designed each of the roofing options. The first option, a Louver system, was constructed of 50 mm
x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. The second roofing system, Sunscreen, was a simple fabric roof created
using an extrusion. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options.
2 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Primary Option, and click OK.
4 In the Project Browser, right-click the 3D View Primary Option, and click Duplicate. Repeat this step two
more times until you have three copies of the view.
5 Right-click each of the copies, and click Rename. Rename the three copies as follows:
■ Secondary Option
■ Tertiary Option
■ Last Option
6 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option.
7 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and
louver) are visible.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Secondary Option.
11 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, and click OK.
18 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Last Option.
19 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option, and click
OK.
25 Select Structure.
26 Under Option Set, click Accept Primary.
An alert is displayed, asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this
option set and remove the option set.
28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog, click Delete to remove the views that used options, since you
no longer need them.
29 Select Roofing.
30 Under Option Set, click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model, delete the other design option
geometry and any dedicated option views.
31 In the alert dialog, click Yes.
32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog, click Delete.
33 In the Design Options dialog, click Close.
34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option. The other options were removed
along with any dedicated option views.
In this exercise, you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various
combinations. After exploring the combinations, you selected a design, made it part of the building model, and deleted
the discarded design options.
Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You can
create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific
phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information
into views and schedules. This allows you to create phase-specific project
documentation, complete with schedules. For the client, you can create a visual
In the lesson and exercises that follow, you work in a simple building model that
requires renovation. You create new phases, demolish existing construction, and
then add new building model elements. In the second exercise, you apply
991
Using Phasing
In the lesson and exercises that follow, you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new
phases, demolish existing walls and doors, then add new walls and doors in a different location. This changes room
definition and total building model area.
In the second exercise, you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences
in the phase-specific room schedules.
NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the
goals of this tutorial, you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so, go to the Settings menu,
click Project Units, define the units, and click OK.
When you create a new project, two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. As you add
new elements to the building model, they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. This
phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties.
4 Click Cancel.
5 Select any of the exterior walls.
7 Click Cancel.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
9 In the drawing area, drag a pick box around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it.
TIP If this were a multi-story building, you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you
capture all of the components.
After you release the mouse button, all of the building model elements, including the door tags, are
highlighted in red. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Rename.
16 In the Rename dialog, enter Level 1 - Existing, and click OK.
You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. This refers to the ceiling plan and the
level line visible in any of the elevation views. Since this is a phase-specific view, you do not want to rename
the corresponding views and level.
17 Click No.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1 - Existing, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Level 1 - Existing, and click Rename.
20 In the Rename dialog, enter Level 1 - Demo, and click OK.
You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition.
27 Click New.
A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list.
31 Click OK.
Next, you begin demolition. There are two ways to demolish an element. You can select it and change its
Phase parameter to Demolished, or you can use the demolish tool.
33 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration, select the interior walls one
at a time, in the upper left corner and the lower right corner.
As you click each wall, its display changes to a dashed line.
Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. That is
because doors are wall-hosted elements. When you demolish the host, you demolish all elements hosted
by it.
57 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ( ), and click Shading with Edges.
All elements are displayed in this view, regardless of phase, because the phase filter is set to Show All. You
could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.
58 If necessary, spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls, which are displayed as red.
Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides.
In this exercise, you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters
to display each phase.
In the next exercise, you learn how to use phase-specific room tags.
NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the
goals of this tutorial, you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so, go to the Settings menu,
click Project Units, define the units, and click OK.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - Existing, and maximize the view.
7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Room.
8 Using the following illustration as a guide, click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.
Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase,
yet they have different room numbers.
17 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Room Schedule - Existing.
18 On the Window menu, click Close Hidden Windows.
19 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Room Schedule - New Construction.
20 On the Window menu, click Tile.
Notice that in each phase-specific schedule, room information differs based upon the phase of the view
the tags are in. In addition, notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original
building model. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space
than the original.
In this exercise, you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. You also opened two
schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase.
model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project
file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other
in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model
Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared
coordinates:
In this tutorial, you link several building models within a single project file in
which only a site plan has been developed. You position the building models on
the site plan, modify their visibility, and manage the links throughout the project.
In the final lesson, you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember
1001
1002 | Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates
Linking Building Models
In this lesson, you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You link multiple
instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You position the building models on the site, modify
their visibility, and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.
■ Center-to-Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the
model.
NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. This center changes
as the footprint of your model changes.
■ Origin-to-Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit
Architecture model.
■ By shared coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates, this option
will place the link at a predefined location.
■ Cursor at origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.
NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system; however, this system is not exposed
to the user.
■ Cursor at base point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. This option is grayed out.
■ Cursor at center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.
This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Because training files are used in multiple
tutorials and are normally installed as read-only, you need to copy the three training files to a different
directory and make them writable. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer, you can do
so. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site, c_Townhouse,
c_Condo_Complex. Otherwise, use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Site.rvt.
4 On the File menu, click Save As, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step, and save
the file there.
5 On the File menu, click Close.
6 Repeat the previous four steps for the following files:
■ c_Townhouse
■ c_Condo_Complex
7 Open the Model Linking folder, select the three files, right-click, and click Properties.
8 Clear Read-only, and click OK.
All three files now reside, with write permission, in the Model Linking folder that you created.
10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.
13 Click Open.
The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model.
16 For the move start point, click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model.
17 For the move endpoint, click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.
21 Click Open.
The townhouse building model is displayed above the site model.
24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and, when the vertical line displays, click to specify the
rotation start point.
25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise, and click to specify the end of the rotation.
27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.
28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.
30 For the starting point, select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.
31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point.
A copy of the townhouse is displayed on the right side of the site project.
32 On the Edit menu, click Rotate, and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this
view.
In this exercise, you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2008 models into a site model. After linking the files, you
rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development.
In the next exercise, you modify the elevation of the townhouses.
Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. This is
apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface.
3 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project, press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the
status bar, and click to select the line. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site
project and not to the linked condo complex project.
Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays
for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the
model.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this
view.
In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked
file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host
project.
In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have
not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display
to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the
linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance
of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options.
NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still are displayed in the
remaining elevation views.
12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.
Apply halftone
25 Click OK.
26 You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link.
On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt.
Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.
30 Click OK.
31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK.
32 On the File menu, click Save.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this
view.
In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines
and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the
building model at the same height as the other linked building model.
In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have
not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate
environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the
host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command
to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates
Between Building Models.
3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute.
The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you
use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained.
If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken
because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common
scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it.
5 Click Unload.
NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must
be opened and drawn.
7 Click OK.
Notice that the condo complex link is no longer displayed in the host project.
TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location.
■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify
which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Add Link dialog, under Open Worksets, select
Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened
and drawn.
■ Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked
files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this,
go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional
worksets you need opened.
■ Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled
building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host
project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked
files.
■ Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must
keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the
link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed
in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you
should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.
TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the
host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not
to open that workset, the link is not loaded.
NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by
right-clicking the link in the Project Browser.
Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important
that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects.
In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson,
you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects.
If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.
TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or
shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog.
NOTE This lesson requires the completion of the lesson “Linking Building Models” on page 1003, and the resulting project
files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, “Linking Building Models” on page 1003, and the resulting
project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before
continuing.
Dataset
Publish coordinates
1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.
3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host
project.
4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK.
On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for
you to select another link.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view.
You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate
system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.
11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project.
After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the
definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you
have only two choices:
15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as.
Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location.
16 Click Change.
17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK.
18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK.
19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK.
20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B.
Save locations
NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted
to save the locations to the linked files.
25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved checkbox for the townhouse project is no
longer checked.
26 Click OK.
27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release
the mouse button, a warning is displayed.
You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location.
You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action.
Relocate a project
31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.
Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are
offset the distance that you moved the origin.
33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position.
34 On the File menu, click Save.
35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK.
36 On the File menu, click Close.
NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked
files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture.
In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the
host project with respect to the linked projects.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you
have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing.
Dataset
Link a project
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor.
This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project
file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file.
■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
■ Select c_Condo_Complex.
■ Under Positioning, select By shared coordinates.
■ Click Open.
Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project.
The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The
current active location is Lot A.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view.
In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the
townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes.
In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you
have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing.
Manage locations
1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations.
2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate.
3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK.
4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK.
Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can
select Lot C if necessary.
10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish.
In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north
and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you
have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing.
Dataset
8 Click OK.
In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project, you can sort the schedule data and
display a single table entry per door type.
9 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, right-click Door Schedule, and click Properties.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.
11 In the Schedule Properties box, select Family and Type for Sort by.
Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type, the schedule lists the total count for each
door type, and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings.
In this exercise, you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You also sorted the
schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.
You have completed this tutorial.
1031
1032 | Chapter 29 Customizing Project Settings and Templates
Modifying Project and
System Settings 29
In this tutorial, you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2008 working
environment. In the first lesson, you modify the system environment, which is
independent of the project settings. In the second lesson, you modify project
that project. Finally, you create an office template, and set it as your default
template.
1033
Modifying System Settings
In this lesson, you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Architecture. System settings are local to each
computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project or template files.
NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using
this color.
15 Click OK.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
17 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall.
■ Under Notifications, select your preferred Save Reminder interval, and select Normal for Tooltip
Assistance.
■ Under Username, enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Your login name displays by
default.
■ Under Journal File Cleanup, select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals
older than (days).
Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Journal files
are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. These files are used
primarily in the software support process. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate
lost steps or files. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session.
29 Click OK.
Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you
place the cursor over any building component.
TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. On the File menu, choose New ➤ Project,
and click Browse to select a template.
4 Click Cancel.
5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.
6 In the Browse for Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click OK.
7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse.
This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use
to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are
some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, architectural
firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.
8 Click Cancel.
9 In the Options dialog, under Libraries, notice the list of library names.
The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit
Architecture to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path,
and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture
Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.
When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit Architecture file, you can click on the library folder
located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons
in the left pane of the dialog.
13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit
Architecture projects, templates, or families, and click OK.
TIP You may want to create a new folder first, and select it as the library path.
The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.
The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog.
15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list, and click OK.
16 On the File menu, click Open.
17 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the My Library icon.
Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. If you work in a large office, you may
want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office
standards.
18 Click Cancel.
19 On the Settings menu, click Options.
20 Click the File Locations tab.
21 Under Libraries, select My Library.
25 Click OK.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, “Specifying Spelling Options” on page 1038.
12 On the Standard toolbar, click to open a new Revit Architecture project using the default template.
13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text.
14 Click in the drawing area, and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.
15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
16 On the Tools menu, click Spelling.
Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. It allowed
SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.
17 Click OK.
18 On the Settings menu, click Options.
19 In the Options dialog, click the Spelling tab.
20 Under Settings, click Restore Defaults.
This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.
6 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000;
and enter 500 ;.
7 Under Object Snaps, notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.
These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. For example, if you
want to snap an object to a wall midpoint, enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you
commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint, snapping reverts to the system default
settings.
TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching, use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel
button, you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. While sketching, you can also use
the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out.
11 While sketching a generic straight wall, zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to
500 mm.
This is the increment that you added previously.
12 While sketching the wall, enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.
Notice that when snapping is turned off completely, the listening dimension reflects the exact length of
the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.
Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping, the command
is only active for one click of the mouse.
17 Enter SM.
18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.
23 Click OK.
24 On the File menu, click Close, and do not save the file.
25 Proceed to the next lesson, “Modifying Project Settings” on page 1041.
This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the
exterior wall face, you render a region to observe the changes.
3 Click Duplicate.
This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.
4 In the New Material dialog, enter Masonry - Fieldstone, and click OK.
You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. Notice that
the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. In the steps that follow, you
modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.
15 Click OK.
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 02 Entry Level.
TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Rendering.
After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model and select the scene, the rendering process begins.
When finished, the fieldstone material that you created is displayed.
TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail, click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.
Zoom into the model, select Region Raytrace, and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render.
Notice the roof did not render. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. In the exercise,
“Controlling Object Styles” on page 1047, you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
5 Click New.
6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog, click Custom.
7 Under Custom, click Import.
8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Architecture software.
TIP Typically, your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Revit Architecture\Training. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set
during installation.
12 Click OK.
TIP If the pattern does not display, adjust your zoom settings as needed.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
2 On the keyboard, use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three windows
facing you.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
4 Select one of the rectangular windows.
select .
8 In the Materials dialog, click By Category (located under the Name list).
This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting.
select .
15 In the Materials dialog, click By Category.
16 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK.
17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray.
24 On the right side of the dialog, under AccuRender, for Texture, click .
25 In the Material Library dialog, expand Solid Colors, and select Reds and Oranges.
26 Under Name, select Indian,Dark,Glossy, and click OK.
27 Under Surface Pattern, click the Color value, select a red color, and click OK.
28 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
29 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.
Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type.
6 Click OK twice.
You have created a new line pattern; now you must apply it. There are two ways to apply the line style to
the roof. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view, or
you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views.
7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
8 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.
9 In the Object Styles dialog, under Category, select Roofs.
10 Select Red for Line Color, and select Roof Line for Line Pattern.
NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera
view where you expect to see a solid line. Plans, sections, elevations, and orthogonal 3D views show line color
and pattern.
23 Click OK twice.
29 Click OK.
30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
31 In the Type Selector, select Zoning Setback.
32 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ Click .
■ Click .
NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view, use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting
tab of the Design Bar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created, as if they are placed on an
overlay of the view.
37 Click OK.
NOTE If Site is not selected, select it and then clear Property Lines.
42 Click OK.
Modifying Annotations
In this exercise, you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. You
also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window
type.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
7 Click OK twice.
You have created a new dimension style.
16 Click Cancel.
17 On the Settings menu, click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.
18 In the Tags dialog, under Category, scroll down to Windows.
Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.
19 Click Load.
20 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window
Tag - Number.rfa.
In the preview image, notice that the label displays 1i. This indicates this tag is designed to display the
window instance value rather than the type value.
21 Click Open.
22 In the Tags dialog, scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag - Number is now the assigned tag.
This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.
23 Under Loaded Tags, click M_Window Tag - Number, and select the drop-down arrow that displays.
Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Leave M_Window
Tag - Number as the assigned tag.
24 Click OK.
25 Press and hold CTRL, select the 3 window tags, and press Delete.
30 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag, M_Window Tag - Number.
31 Under Leader, verify that Create is clear, and click OK.
The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Both window tag types can coexist within
the same view.
TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps, you can have multiple views: one displaying window
type tags and the other displaying window instance values.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
6 Click OK.
Unless overridden, dimensions use these project settings.
NOTE In this project, temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings.
The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking the control.
TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties
dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.
In this table, you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another.
You do not select a view scale to move it. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the
column based on the direction.
12 Click OK.
13 On the File menu, click Save.
14 On the File menu, click Close.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Project Browser Organization” on page 1056.
3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order, and notice the progression of each view:
6 In the Project Browser, expand both the Architectural and Structural views.
7 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization.
8 Select Phase, and click Apply.
In the Project Browser, notice that Views are grouped based on Phase.
19 Click OK.
20 In the Browser Organization dialog, select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization, and
click OK.
21 In the Project Browser, under Views, expand Complete, expand 3D Views, and expand both Architectural
and Structural.
Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase, View
Type (Family and Type), and Discipline.
In this lesson, you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. All the settings
that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a template file. By saving
these settings as a template and using it throughout the office, you maintain consistent standards and reduce the
amount of repetitive work. In the lesson that follows, you create an office template.
9 In the Project Browser, navigate throughout the various views and schedules.
Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. Other templates, such
as the structural template, are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules, but the view properties
have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools.
14 Click Open.
15 Under Create New, select Project Template, and click OK.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Project Settings” on page 1060.
■ Materials
■ Fill patterns
■ Object styles
■ Line styles, weights, and patterns
■ Annotations
■ Project units
■ Temporary dimensions
■ Detail levels
■ Project Browser organization
In addition to the list above, there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that
can be saved in a template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise.
During this exercise, specific modifications are not dictated. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt
the template to your needs. For more details on modifying these settings, see the previous lesson, “Modifying System
Settings” on page 1034 or refer to the Help documentation.
RELATED See “Modifying System Settings” on page 1034 for more information on creating new AccuRender
materials.
When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template, be aware that access
to the original material library may be necessary at some point. You may want to save the material to a
library located on a network path.
TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Model patterns represent actual element appearance
on a building. You can align, rotate, and move model patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines.
RELATED See “Modifying Project Settings” on page 1041 for more information on creating new fill patterns.
TIP When the material of a component is set to by category, it adopts the material assigned to its object styles
category.
10 Click the Model Objects tab, and scroll through the list of categories.
11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed.
12 If necessary, create new subcategories.
13 Click the Annotation Objects tab.
14 Modify categories, and create new subcategories as needed.
15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog.
Modify arrowheads
35 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.
41 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.
TIP In the drawing area, you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines.
60 Under Doors and Windows, specify the default location for temporary dimensions.
61 Click OK.
NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. To move the view scales, click the arrows between columns.
The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa.
64 Click OK.
73 On the Settings menu, there are several additional commands that control the project environment.
Although these settings can be saved within a template, you should consider each carefully before applying
changes to a template.
For example, you can save rendered scene settings to a template. However, you may only want to add
generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. In such a case, you must decide if
the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work.
Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Use the table below as a checklist,
and make modifications in each area as necessary. Links to associated tutorials are provided. You can find
additional information in Help. Each command is available on the Settings menu.
Project Parameters This command is covered in an exercise If necessary, you can add project (and shared)
later in this lesson. See “Setting up Shared parameters to a template. This could be useful for
and Project Parameters” on page 1072. things such as hardware, furniture, or electrical fixtures.
Phases “Project Phasing” on page 991 If necessary, you can set up the phases, phase filters,
and graphic overrides applicable to most projects.
Room and Area “Area Analysis” on page 797 If necessary, you can create and modify area schemes
Settings if there are default settings applicable to most projects.
View Templates This command is covered in an exercise Create and modify the view templates to control the
later in this lesson. See “Modifying Views appearance of default views.
and View Templates” on page 1067.
Render Scene This command is covered in an exercise If necessary, you can create scene settings and save
later in this lesson. See “Modifying Render them to the template.
Scene Settings” on page 1069
Site Settings “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site If necessary, you can set the default contour line
Settings” on page 880 interval, the section cut material, and the poche depth.
74 Proceed to the next exercise, “Loading and Modifying Families and Groups” on page 1064.
3 To modify, create, or load a new door type, click on the Options Bar.
Use the instructions in the table below to load, create, or modify a door.
Goal: Steps:
Load new door type In the Element Properties dialog, select Load. Navigate to the directory containing the
door type. Select it, and click Open.
Modify door type In the Element Properties dialog, select Edit/New. Make modifications, and click OK.
Create new door type In the Element Properties dialog, select Edit/New. Click Duplicate. Enter Name, and
click OK. Modify type properties, and click OK.
4 Click OK.
5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.
You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this
tab. You can also load families and groups from the File menu.
12 Click OK.
13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps, load, create, or modify any component families or
groups as necessary.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Views and View Templates” on page 1067.
3 Specify each value according to your needs. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for
this view type.
4 If necessary, rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications.
5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list.
6 Click OK.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
8 On the View menu, click Apply View Template.
Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Upon the application of the view template, the
view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. After applying the
template, the view is not linked to the template in any way. Subsequent modifications to the view template
do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. There is no limit to the number of
times you can apply a view template to a view. In addition, there is no limit to the number of view templates
that you can apply.
NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. This would result in the Site Plan view
template becoming the default template for all new plan views.
18 If you modified any other view templates, open the view from the Project Browser, and apply the appropriate
template.
20 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, review the existing floor plans.
21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and, in the context menu, notice that you
have the option to rename, duplicate, or delete this view.
If necessary, you can rename this view according to your preference. You can also duplicate or delete the
view.
22 In the Project Browser, review the floor plans, ceiling plans, and elevations. Rename, duplicate, or delete
them as needed.
23 To add additional levels to the template, click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar.
Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view.
Create 3D views
34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog.
35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target.
38 If you want to add schedules to your template, select the category type, and click OK.
39 In the Schedule Properties dialog, make the following modifications as needed:
40 Click OK.
41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.
TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. To do so, select the default titleblock, and
click OK. After the sheet is created, select the titleblock and delete it. You can still add views to the sheet. To
later add a titleblock to a sheet, go to the View menu, and click New ➤ Place Titleblock.
43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar.
TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet.
44 To rename or renumber the sheet, right-click the sheet in the Project Browser, and click Rename.
45 Create new sheets as needed.
Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet.
46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Modifying Render Scene Settings” on page 1069.
■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky, and changes the color automatically depending on the
sun and sky conditions.
■ Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering.
■ 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors.
■ 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors.
TIP As you select options, the relevant tab appears; for example, select the Clouds option, and a Clouds tab
appears.
■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. Choose from bitmap, tiff, jpeg, or targa.
Background images are available from the AccuRender software, which is included on the Revit
Architecture CD. Be sure that you have installed this software; if not, you can install AccuRender by
running the install program on the Revit Architecture CD.
■ Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background.
■ Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog.
■ Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering.
■ Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information),
if one exists.
7 Click OK.
8 Under Scene Settings, clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view.
9 Click Sun.
10 On the Solar Angles tab, verify On is selected and select By Date, Time, and Place for Specify Solar Angles.
11 Specify the date and time, place, settings, and colors, and then click OK.
12 Under Plant Season, choose the appropriate season for plant rendering.
Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view; for example, a deciduous tree in summer
appears in full bloom with leaves, while in winter, it is completely bare.
■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. This
works on opaque faces only. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Back face culling decreases
rendering time and space; however, the quality also is lower.
■ Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. This
setting is effective for region raytraces.
■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft, Medium, Good, Better,
Best.
■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. This value
is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any
subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar.
■ Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. Higher values
cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface.
Meaningful values are between 0 and 1.
■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft, Medium, Good,
Better, Best.
Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better
resolve the value of the pixel. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. Draft
provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. Best is the slowest, but provides the highest quality.
■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. Shadows based on the size of the light
source are calculated.
■ Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass.
■ Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass.
■ Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. This is
a very time consuming operation but, when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft
shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts.
3 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
6 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
7 On the File menu, click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.
You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight.
You can save these mappings to a text file, and they become the set mappings for the project. These settings
are retained within the project template; therefore, you do not need to worry about where the text file is
saved.
8 In the dialog, match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight, for example, Pen
Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1, Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2, and so on. Set as many
pen-line weight mappings as desired.
9 Select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
When you import a DWG or DXF file, each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen
number/line weight settings you created.
10 Proceed to the next exercise, “Setting up Shared and Project Parameters” on page 1072.
NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. If a file already exists, you can browse to that
file and modify it as needed.
2 Click Create.
This allows you to name the external parameter file. If this template will be used by multiple people within
an office, you may want to save the file to a network location.
7 Under Parameter group, select a group that you want to add parameters to.
8 Under Parameters, click New.
9 Name the Parameter, and specify the Discipline and Type of Parameter.
10 Click OK.
11 For each parameter group, add required parameters.
12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters.
2 Under Name, select the first printer for which you want to create named settings.
3 Under Settings, click Setup.
4 Click Save As.
5 In the New dialog, enter a name for the print setting and click OK.
6 Modify the printer settings.
7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer, modify the printer settings, click Save as, enter a new
name for the printer, and click OK. Create additional settings as needed.
8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer.
9 In the Print dialog, select a different printer, click Setup, and create new settings for this printer.
10 Repeat these steps as needed.
TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer.
16 To use the template, go to the File menu, and click New ➤ Project.
17 Select Browse, and navigate to the location where you saved the template.
18 Select the template, and click Open.
19 Click OK.
The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project.
You can also set this template as your default template.
TIP There are other ways you can create a template. If you have a project, you could delete the model geometry
and save the empty project as a template file. This can provide a good starting point for a template. In addition,
you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another.
In this lesson, you modified settings, loaded components, and saved them to a template. By investing the time to
individualize your template, you ensure that office standards are maintained. In addition, you significantly reduce the
amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.